CruiseCommand 785CE

Installation, Operation
and Troubleshooting Manual
MM14330-I Rev. H.2 6-08
SW13867.1F
O PREFACE

O PREFACE
IMPORTANT: It is important to keep this Manual in a safe place for future reference. The manual contains
answers to questions that may arise during operation or installation of the ZF Marine Electronics Control
System and its options.

0-1 CruiseCommand 785CE Processors

Table 1: CruiseCommand Processor

ZF Marine Electronics
Processor Part No. ENGINE Elect. CLUTCH Solenoid TROLL Solenoid No. Plug Stations

785CE YES YES YES 4

This manual is intended for use with the above Processors.

0-2 Conventional Symbols Used in the Manual

Throughout this manual special attention should be paid to the following:

NOTE: Contains helpful information

IMPORTANT: Contains helpful information.

CAUTION: Damage to the equipment may occur if these messages are not followed.

WARNING: Personal injury may result if these messages are not followed.

0-3 Important Information

WARNING: Personal Injury could occur if the following steps are not followed exactly.

This manual is written describing all possible options available for this Processor. Your vessel may not require all
of these options. Refer to the System Drawing in Appendix C for specifics on what your vessel requires. Refer
only to the Sections that apply to your vessel. If you wish to use one of the available options listed, please contact
a ZF Marine Electronics Representative for futher information.

Page O O-1
O PREFACE

Page O O-2
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SW13867.1F

Table of Contents
CruiseCommand 785CE
Installation, Operation and Troubleshooting Manual
01 Preface - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0-1
0-1 CruiseCommand 785CE Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-1
table 1: CruiseCommand Processor............................................................................................................................0 0-1
0-2 Conventional Symbols Used in the Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-1
0-3 Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-1
Table of Contents................................................................................................................................TOC-1
Revision List ......................................................................................................................................TOC-11

01 INTRODUCTION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1
0-1 Manual Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
0-2 Basic Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
0-2.1 785CE Processor (Throttle - Electronic, Shift-Solenoid, Four Pluggable Remote Stations....1-1

0-3 System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

0-3.1 Standard Processor Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
0-3.2 Optional Processor Features 1-2

2 OPERATION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-3
2-1 DC Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-2 Taking Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Figure 1: Station Taking Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-3 Basic Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-3.1 Normal Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Figure 2-1: Control Head Detents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-3.2 Trolling Valve (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-3.2.1 Operation in Non-Troll Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-3.2.2 Operation in Troll Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-3.2.2.1 Turn Troll ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-3.2.2.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-3.2.2.3 Turn Troll OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2-4 Start Interlock (if used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2-5 Station Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Figure 3: Remote Stations Before Transfer of Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 4: Remote Station Transfer after Transfer of Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2-6 Warm-up Mode (Throttle Only Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Figure 5 Control Head Warm-up Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 6: Control Head Normal Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2-7 High / Low Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2-7.1 Low Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-7.2 High Idle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-7.3 Selecting Between High / Low Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Figure 7: High/Low Idle Mode Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

TOC-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS

2-8 Engine Synchronization (Multi Screw) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2-8.1 Synchronization Criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-8.2 Synchronization Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-8.2.1 Equal Throttle Electronic Synchronization (default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-8.2.2 Active Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-8.3 Synchronization Indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-8.4 Turning Synchronization OFF/ON when Criteria is Met. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-8.4.1 Turning Sychronization OFF: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-8.4.2 Turning Synchronization ON: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

2-9 One Lever Operation Mode (Multi Screw) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Figure 8: Step A - One Lever Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Figure 9: Step B - One Lever Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-9.2 Turning OFF one Lever Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

2-10 Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

2-10.1 External Alarm Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-10.2 Auxiliary Backup Control System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-10.3 Clutch Pressure Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-10.4 Multiple Screw Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-10.5 Station Expander (SE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

3 PLAN THE INSTALLATION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-12

3-1 System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Figure 10: Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-1.1 Processor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-1.2 Control Head(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-1.3 Wire Harnesses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Table 2: Processor Harness Connector Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Figure 11: Harness Plug Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Figure 12: Processor Connector and Hasrness Plug Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-1.3.1 Control Head Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-1.3.2 Power, Start Interlock, Clutch Pressure (optional), Alarm )(optional) Harness . . . . . . 3-14
3-1.3.3 Serial Communication Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-1.4 Additonal Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-1.4.4 Clutch Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-1.4.5 Clutch/Troll Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-1.4.6 Throttle Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-1.4.7 Tach Sensor Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

4 INSTALLATION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-19
4-1 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Figure 13: Processor Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-2 Control Head(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.2.1 400, MC2000 and 700 Series Control Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-2.2 500 Series Control Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-2.3 Handheld Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

4-3 Wire Harness Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

4-3.1 Harness Plug Insertion and Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-3.2 Standard Control Head Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-3.2.1 Control Head Harness with Two Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-3.2.2 Control Head Harness with One Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-3.3 Standard Power/Start Interlock/Alarm (optional)/Clutch Pressure Switch (optional) Harness4-21
4-3.3.1 DC Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-3.3.2 Start Interlock Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
TOC-2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Figure 14: Start Interlock Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-3.3.3 External Alarm Circuit (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-3.3.4 Clutch Pressure Switch (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-3.4 Serial Communication Harness (Multi Screw) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-3.4.1 Twin Screw Serial Communication (Required for Both Synchronization Types) . . . . . 4-22
4-3.4.2 Tachometer Sensor (Required for Active Synchronization Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-3.5 Additonal Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-3.5.1 Throttle Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-3.5.2 Clutch Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-3.5.3 Clutch/Troll Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

4-4 Engine Stop Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

5 SET UP PROCEDURES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-24

5-1 Processor Components used during Set Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Figure 15; Processor Display LED and Arrow Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5-1.1 Processor Display LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Figure 16: Display LED at Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Figure 17: Display LED Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5-1.2 Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Figure 18: Arrow Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5-1.2.1 "Up" and "Down" Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5-1.2.2 "Left" and "Right" Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5-1.2.3 "Left" Push Button Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Figure 19: Error Menu Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5-1.2.4 "Right" Push Button Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Figure 20: Display LED Four Digit Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

5-2 Activating Set Up Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

5-3 Storing Values To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

5-4 Function Codes and Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Table 3: Processor Function Codes .......................................................................................................................... 5-26
Table 4: Electric Throttle Function Codes................................................................................................................. 5-27
Table 5: Clutch Function Codes ................................................................................................................................ 5-27
Table 6: Trolling Valve Function Codes..................................................................................................................... 5-27
Table 7: Troubleshooting Function Codes ................................................................................................................ 5-28

5-5 Field Service Test Unit (Break-out Box) and Multimeter Use . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Table 8: Electric Throttle Functions requiring Field Service Test Unit and Multimeter............................................ 5-28
Table 9: Solenoid Trolling Functions requiring Filed Service Test Unit and Multimeter .......................................... 5-29

5-6 System Programming And Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

5-6.1 Processor Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5-6.1.1 Function Code A1 - Number of Engines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Figure 21: Display LED Function A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5-6.1.2 Function CodeA0 - Processor Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Figure 22: Display LED Function A0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5-6.1.3 Function CodeA2 - One Lever Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Figure 23: Display LED Function A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5-6.1.4 Function Code A3 - SE (Station Expander) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5-6.1.5 Function Code A4 - Neutral Indication Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Figure 24: Display LED Function A4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5-6.2 Throttle Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Table 10: Throttle Functions Performed during Dock Trials ....................................................................................... 5-31
5-6.2.6 Function Code E0 - Electric Engine Throttle Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Figure 25: Display LED Function E0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5-6.2.6 Function Code E7 - Active Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Figure 26: Display LED Function E7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

TOC-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5-6.3 Clutch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Table 11: Basic Clutch Functions Performed during Sea Trials.................................................................................. 5-32
5-6.3.1 Function Code C0 - Clutch Pressure Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Figure 27: Display LED Function C0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5-6.3.2 Function Code C1 - Clutch Interlock Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Figure 28: Display LED Function C1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5-6.3.3 Function Code C4 - Proportional Pause Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Figure 29: Display LED Function C4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5-6.4 Troll Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Table 12: Troll Function Performed during Dock Trials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Table 13: Troll Function Performed during Sea Trials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5-6.4.4 Function Code L0 - Troll Enable and Control Head Lever Troll Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Figure 30: 20 Degree Troll Range - Type 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Figure 31: 35 Degree Troll Range - Type 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Figure 32: 45 Degree Troll Range - Type 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Figure 33: Display LED Function L0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5-6.4.5 L1 - Solenoid Troll Valve Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Table 14: Solenoid Trolling Valve Function L1 Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5-6.5 Troubleshooting Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
5-6.5.1 Function Code H0 - Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
5-6.5.2 Function Code H1 - Return to Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
5-6.5.3 Solenoid Troubleshooting Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
5-6.5.3.1 Function Code H2 - Driver Fault Detection Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Table 15: Solenoid Error Status Enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

6 DOCK TRIALS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-38

6-1 Control Head (Engines Stopped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
6-2 Start Interlock (Engines Stopped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
6-3 Throttle Dock Settings (Engines Stopped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
6-3.1 E-2 Throttle Minimum and E-3 Throttle Maximum Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
6-3.1.1 Processor Throttle Signal Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Table 16: Throttle Output Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
6-3.1.2 Throttle Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Figure 35: Display LED Function E2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Figure 36: Display LED Function E3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
6-4 E4 - Throttle Maximum Astern (Engines Stopped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Figure 37: Display LED Function E4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
6-5 Engine Stop Switches (Engines Running) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
6-6 Control Head Command Checks (Engines Running) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
6-7 E1 - Throttle in Neutral (Cummins-Quatum Engines Only) (Engines Running) . . . . . . 6-41
Figure 38: Display LED Function E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
6-8 E5 - Throttle Pause Following Shift (Engines Running) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Figure 39: Display LED Function E5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
6-9 E6 - High Idle (Engines Running) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Figure 40: Display LED Function E6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
6-10 L7 - Lock Up Percetnage (Hurth Trnasmissions Only) (Engines Running). . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Figure 41: Display LED Function L7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43

7 Sea Trials - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-44

7-1 Full Speed Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
7-2 Full Speed Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
7-2.1 In-Gear Delay [C200] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
7-2.2 Neutral Delay [C201] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
7-2.3 Store C2 - Proporational Pause Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Figure 42: Display LED Function C7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
7-3 C3 - Proporational (Reversal) Pause Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
7-3.1 Determine C3 Pause Requirment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
7-3.2 Program Function Code C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Figure 32: Display LED Function C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
TOC-4
TABLE OF CONTENTS

7-3.3 Testing Proportional (Reversal) Pause Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

7-4 Synchronization Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

7-4.1 Equal throttle Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7-4.2 Active Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-46

7-5 L2 - Trolling Minimum and L3 - Trolling Maximum Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Table 16: Record Propeller Shaft RPM at Idle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
7-5.1 L2 - Troll Minimum Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Figure 44: Display LED Function L2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Table 17 Record L2 - Minimum Trolling Pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7-5.1.1 L3 - Troll Maximum Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Figure 45: Display LED Function L2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Table 18: Record L3 - Maximum Trolling Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7-6 L4 - Troll Throttle Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Figure 46: Display LED Function L4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
7-7 L5 - Troll Pulse Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Figure 47: Display LED Function L5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
7-8 L6 - Troll Pulse Percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Figure 48: Display LED Function L6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
7-9 Sea Trial Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Table 19: Vessel Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
7-9.1 Control System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Table 20: Processor .................................................................................................................................................... 7-50
Table 21: Harness/Cable Lengths ............................................................................................................................... 7-51
Table 22: Power Supply .............................................................................................................................................. 7-51
Table 23 Dock Trials .................................................................................................................................................. 7-52
Table 24: Record at Dock (Requires use of Field Service Test Unit) .......................................................................... 7-52
Table 25: Sea Trials..................................................................................................................................................... 7-52
Table 26 Record during Sea Trials (Requires use of Field Service test Unit) ............................................................ 7-52
.....................................................................................
7-9.2 Record Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Table 27: Record Processor Functions ....................................................................................................................... 7-53
Table 28: Record Throttle Functions........................................................................................................................... 7-53
Table 29: Record Clutch Functions............................................................................................................................. 7-53
Table 30: Record Troll Functions ................................................................................................................................ 7-53
Table 31: Troubleshooting Functions) ........................................................................................................................ 7-54

8 CONTROL OPTIONS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-55

8-1 External Alarm Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
Figure 49: Example of Control System Status Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
Figure 50: Example of External Alarm connection Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
8-1.1 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
8-2 Auxilliary (Backup) control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
8-3 Clutch Pressure Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
8-3.1 C0 - Clutch Pressure Interlock Methods of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
8-3.1.1 01 - Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
8-3.1.2 02 - Throttle Clutch Pressure Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
Figure 51: Clutch Pressure Switch with Processor Harness of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57

8-4 Station Expander (SE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

9 PERIODIC CHECKS AND MAINTENANCE - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-58

9-1 Control Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
9-2 Control Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58

TOC-5
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Appendix A
PARTS LIST.............................................................................................................................................. A-1
MMC-280 Rev.L 12-04 ........................................................................................................................... A-3
400 Series Standard Control Head Variations
MMC-329 Rev.C 8/03............................................................................................................................. A-7
MC2000 Series Standard Control Head Variations
MMC-307 Rev.G 8/03 ......................................................................................................................... A-13
700 Series Standard Control Head Variations
MMC-279 Rev.B 7/02........................................................................................................................... A-19
400 Series Weather Mount Enclosure
Data Instruments Pressure Transducer ................................................................................................ A-21
S-214 Rev.E 5/03................................................................................................................................. A-23
Automatic Power Selector (APS) Model: 13505
Drawing 11488D-1 Twin Screw Single APS Connection & Alternate Remote Switch ......................... A-25
Drawing 11488D-2 Twin Screw Dual APS Connections ....................................................................... A-27
Drawing 11488D-3 APS Notes Page..................................................................................................... A-29
MMC-287 Rev.D 8/03.......................................................................................................................... A-31
Bonding: A.B.Y.C. E-11, 46 CFR 111.05
MMC-288 Rev.E 8-03 .......................................................................................................................... A-33
References and Parts Source
F-253 Rev.B 3/05.................................................................................................................................. A-35
CruiseCommand System Trial Report
MMC-165 Rev.E 2/05 ........................................................................................................................... A-39
Electronic Propulsion Control Systems Three Year Limited Warranty

Appendix B
MMC-172 Rev.Z-Q 8/04 ......................................................................................................................... B-1
Factory Authorized Sales & Service Centers - International
TRAIN-156 Rev G 5/03 .......................................................................................................................... B1-5

B1 TROUBLESHOOTING - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B1-5
B1-1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-5
Figure B1-1: Basic Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-5
B1-1.1 Control Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-6
B1-1.2 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-6
B1-1.3 Electrical Wiring (Harnesses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-6
B1-1.4 Power Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-6
B1-2 Troubleshooting Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-6
B1-3 Problem Resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-8
Figure B1-2: Control Head Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-9
Figure B1-3: Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-9
B1-4 Diagnostic Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-10
Figure B1-4: Display Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-10
Figure B1-5: Display Function A0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-10
Figure B1-6: Display Function H0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-10
Figure B1-7: Display Applied Battery Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-10
Figure B1-8: Display Tachometer Sender Frequency in Hz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-11
Figure B1-9: Display Stations Current Control Head Lever Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-11
Figure B1-10: Display Stations Control Head Transfer Button Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-11
Figure B1-11: Display Software Revision Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-12

TOC-6
TABLE OF CONTENTS

B1-5 Audible Tones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-12

B1-5.1 Slow Repetitive Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-12
Figure B1-12: Slow Repetitive Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-12
B1-5.2 One Long - Three Short Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-13
Figure B1-13: One Long - Three Short Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-13
Figure B1-14: Display Stations Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-14
Figure B1-15: Display Stations A/D Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-14
B1-5.3 Steady Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-15
Figure B1-16: Steady Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-15
B1-5.4 One Long - One Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-15
Figure B1-17: One Long - One Short Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-15
B1-5.5 Three Second Steady Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-15
Figure B1-18: Three Second Steady Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-15
B1-6 Station Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-15
B1-6.1 Command Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-16
B1-6.2 Remote Station Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-16
Figure B1-19: Display Station A/D’s no decimal points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-17
Figure B1-20: Display with Station Transfer Button pushed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-17
B1-6.3 Stuck Transfer Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-17
B1-7 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-18
Table B1-1: Error Messages .........................................................................................................................................B1-18
B1-8 Problem Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-20
Table B1-2: Problem Scenarios ....................................................................................................................................B1-20
B1-9 Cable Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-25
B1-9.1 Power, Start Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-26
Figure B1-21: Power, Start Interlock Harness Pin Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-26
B1-9.2 Power, Start Interlock & Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-26
Figure B1-22: Power, Start Interlock, Clutch Oil Pressure Switch Harness Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-26
B1-9.3 Power, Start Interlock, Pressure Switch & Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-26
Figure B1-23: Power, Start Interlock, Clutch Oil Pressure Switch, and Alarm Harness Pin Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-26
B1-9.4 Throttle, PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-27
Figure B1-24: PWM Throttle Harness Pin Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-27
B1-9.5 Throttle, Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-27
Figure B1-25: Voltage Throttle Harness Pin Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-27
B1-9.6 Throttle, Current, MAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-27
Figure B1-26: Current Throttle Harness Pin Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-27
B1-9.7 Throttle, Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-27
Figure B1-27: Frequency Throttle Harness Pin Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-27
B1-9.8 Clutch Power, Ahead & Astern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-27
Figure B1-28: Clutch Power, Ahead, and Astern Harness Pin Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-27
B1-9.9 Clutch Power, Ahead, Neutral & Astern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-28
Figure B1-29: Clutch, Ahead, Astern, and Neutral Harness Pin Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-28
B1-9.10 Clutch Power, Ahead, Astern, Troll On/Off & Troll Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-28
Figure B1-30: Clutch and Clutch/Troll Harness Pin Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-28
B1-9.11 Serial Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-29
Figure B1-31: Serial Communication Harness Pin Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-29
B1-9.12 Tachometer Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-29
Figure B1-32: Tachometer Sensor Harness Processor End Pin Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-29
B1-9.13 Control Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-29
Figure B1-33: Control Head Harness Pin Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1-29

B2 ERASE EEPROM (H1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B2-30

Service Field Test Unit
Reference Manual
MM13927 Table of Contents .............................................................................................................TOC-1
Revision List .......................................................................................................................................TOC-2

1 INTRODUCTION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1
Figure 1-1: Service Field Test Unit (Break-out Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Figure 1-2: CruiseCommand Connector Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Figure 1-3: Example of ClearCommand Pigtail Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
TOC-7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table 1-1: Connector/Pigtail Descriptions ..................................................................................................................... 1-1

2 PROCEDURE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-1
2-1 Throttle Signal Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-1.1 DC Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Figure 2-4: Throttle Connection (DC Voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-1.2 Current (mA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Figure 2-5: Throttle Connection (Current mA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-1.3 PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) with DC Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Figure 2-6: Throttle Connection (PWM with DC Voltmeter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-1.4 PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) with Duty Cycle Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Figure 2-7: Throttle Connection (PWM with Duty Cycle Meter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-1.5 Frequency (Hz.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Figure 2-8: Throttle Connection (Frequency Hz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-2 CLUTCH TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-2.1 Neutral Solenoid Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Figure 2-9: Clutch Connection (Neutral Solenoid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-2.2 Ahead Solenoid Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Figure 2-10: Clutch Connection (Ahead Solenoid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-2.3 Astern Solenoid Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Figure 2-11: Clutch Connection (Astern Solenoid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-3 TROLL TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-3.1 Troll On/Off Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 2-12: Troll Connection (ON/OFF Solenoid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-3.2 Troll Command (Proportional Solenoid) Testing with Amp Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 2-13: Troll Connection (Proportional Solenoid with Amp Meter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-4 2-SPEED TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-4.1 2nd Gear Disengaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Figure 2-14: 2-Speed Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-4.2 2nd Gear Enaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

3 Parts List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-1

Table 3-2: Parts List ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

Appendix C
Drawing 11748, Single Screw, Two Stations ......................................................................................... C-1
Drawing 11746, Single Screw, Two Pluggable Stations......................................................................... C-3
Drawing 11747, Twin Screw, Two Stations............................................................................................ C-5
Drawing 11745, Twin Screw, Two Pluggable Stations........................................................................... C-7
Drawing 12230-1 Power Option #1 ........................................................................................................ C-9
Drawing 12230-2 Power Option #2 ...................................................................................................... C-11
Drawing 12230-3 Power Option #3 ...................................................................................................... C-13
Drawing 12230-4 Power Option #4 ...................................................................................................... C-15
Drawing 12230-5 Power Option #5 ...................................................................................................... C-17

TOC-8
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Appendix D
CruiseCommand 785CE
Manual Addendum
Table of Contents.................................................................................................................................... D-3

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTIONS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-5

1.1 Throttle Rate Control................................................................................................................D-5
1.2 Speed Boost ............................................................................................................................D-5
1.3 Fixed Neutral Delay .................................................................................................................D-5
1.4 Additional Synchronization Options .........................................................................................D-5

2 THROTTLE RATE CONTROLD-6

2.1 Function Code E9 - Throttle Rate Increase ...............................................................................D-6
2.2 Function Coade EA - Throttle Rate Decrease............................................................................D-6
2.3 Proportional Pause Time Delay (as a function of Throttle Command Output Value) ..................D-7

3 SPEED BOOSTD-7
3.1 Implementation of Speed Boost...............................................................................................D-8
3.2 Function Code F0: Boost_Percent............................................................................................D-8
3.3 Function Code F1: Boost_Duration ..........................................................................................D-9
3.4 Function Code F2: Boost_Start_Delay ....................................................................................D-10
3.5 Function Code F3: Boost_Bypass_Clutch_Delay.....................................................................D-10

4 FIXED NEUTRAL DELAY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-10

5 ADDITIONAL SYNCHRONIZATION OPTIONS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-10

6 COMPLETE FUNCTION CODE LIST - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D-11

TOC-9
REVISIONS LIST

Revision List

Rev Date Revision Description

A 9/01 • Replaced Appendix B SER-165.

B 11/01 Complete Manual revised to current ZF Mathers, LLC. standards

• Revised Sections 3.7, 5.7, 6.3, (4.1 to 4.0), 6.3.4, 7.5, 9.1
• Revised TRAIN-156

C 2/02 Changes made per ELR 637, ECN 2556, 2574.

• Revised Section 9.1
• Revised Appendix A Parts List.
• Revised Appendix B SER-165.

Changes made per ELR 707

• Revised Section 5.4.1
• Revised Appendix B TRAIN-156

Changes made per ELR 694.

• Revised Section 4.1
D 5/02 • Revised Section 4.1, Section 5.2.2, 5.2.3, 6.3.18
• Revised Appendix A - Deutsch Manufacturers sheet and S-214 APS
• Revised Appendix B - SER-165
E 12/02 • Added Warm-up Mode Operations Section
• Revised Section 5.2.2
• Revised Appendix A All forms. Added F-253
• Appendix B Troubleshooting: Revised TRAIN-156 and SER-165. Removed TRAIN-157 and TRAIN-
158, replacing with MM13927.

F 5/03 SOFTWARE REVISED TO .1

• Revised Sections: 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.3, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.7.3, 2.9, 3.2, 3.4.1, 4.2.1.1, 4.2.1.2, 4.2.2, 4.2.4,
4.2.5.1, 4.2.5.2, 4.4, 5.0, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3.3, 5.3.5, 5.3.7, 5.3.10, 5.3.13, 5.3.16, 6.3, 6.9, 7.3.1.1, 7.3.1.2, 7-6,
8.2,
•Added Sections: 5-3.5, 5.3.18, 6.10,
•Added Figures: (Section 3.2, Figure 15)
•Moved Sections: [2.10.1.2, 2.10.2 and 2.10.3, combined making them Section 2.10.1.2. Section
2.10.4 became Section 2.10.2.] [Moved Section 5.3.1 to be 5.3.2 Moving 5.3.2 to be 5.3.1.]
•Revised Figures: (Section 3.1, Figure 12:) (Section 3.2, Figure 13)
•Revised Tables: (Section , Table 1:) (Section 6.3, Table 4:) (Section 6.4.1, Table 5:)
•Appendix A - Replaced Service Sheets with most current Revision Levels
•Appendix B revised SER-165 and TRAIN-156.
•Appendix C added Drawings 12230-1 through 12230-5.

F 11/03 Manual revised to Current Forms. NOTE NEW ADDRESS AND PHONE NUMBERS.
G 3/05 Manual revised to New Company Name, Format, Current Forms, etc.
H 5/06 Manual brought up to ZF marine Electronics format.
•ELR 719 revised Start Interlock contact rating changed to 7 amps.
•ELR 1296 added Engine Stop Switch WARNING to Operation Section.
•Added Parameter A4 - Neutral Indication Tone.
•Default Function Values updated per DVP .1ESW
H.1 4/08 Replaced Forms:
•MMC-123 FASSC, North America & MMC-172 FASSC, International with the current Rev’s.
•Warranty Policy MMC-165 with current Rev.
H.2 6/08 Added Addendum - Description of SW 13867.1F changes:
•Throttle Rate Control (function codes)
•Speed Boost (function codes)
•Fixed Neutral Delay
•Additional Synchronization Options for Function Code E7.

Page 8
1 INTRODUCTION

1 INTRODUCTION
This manual is written to document every possible system option. Your system may not include every available
option for single or multi-screw reverse reduction gear applications. Only those sections that apply to your
specific installation are relevant to your vessel.

If additional options described within this manual are desired, contact your dealer for availability/compatibility
with your system.

1-1 Manual Contents

This manual is divided into 12 Sections which cover, in detail, the features and operation of your system:

• Introduction (Section 1)
• Operation (Section 2)
• Plan the Installation (Section 3)
• Installation (Section 4)
• Set Up Procedures (Section 5)
• Dock Trials (Section 6)
• Sea Trials (Section 7)
• Control Options (Section 8)
• Periodic Checks and Maintenance (Section 9)
• ZF Marine Electronics Service Sheets (Appendix A)
• Troubleshooting (Appendix B)
• System Drawings (Appendix C)

1-2 Basic Theory of Operation

The CruiseCommand Marine Propulsion Control System will hereafter be referred to as CruiseCommand
or System.

The System is electronic and requires a 12 or 24 VDC power supply, one Processor per engine/gear and
one Control Head per remote station.
The CruiseCommand commands the vessel’s throttle and shift using a single Control Head lever.

One wire harness/electric cable per Control Head lever connects the remote station(s) to the Processor(s).
Only one remote station will have command at a given time and the Station-in-Command is indicated by a
red light located on the Control Head. Station transfer is accomplished by pressing the Control Head
mounted transfer button.

1-2.1 785CE Processor (Throttle - Electronic, Shift - Solenoid, Four Pluggable Remote Stations)

The System is designed for pleasure and light commercial marine vessels that require remote
control of:

• electronic engine governors

• solenoid activated clutches or clutch/troll

Page 1-1
1 INTRODUCTION

1-3 System Features

1-3.1 Standard Processor Features

Further information regarding the following features can be found in Section 2 - OPERATION.

• Sequencing of Clutch and Engine Speed.

• Station-in-Command indication.
• Up to four Remote Stations.
• Command of up to five screws.

• Single Control Head lever command of speed and direction.

• Integrated Solenoid Trolling Valve Control.
• Start Interlock.
• Push Button Station Transfer.
• Emergency Reversal Protection.
• Warm-up Mode.
• High/Low Idle Selection.
• Engine Synchronization.
• One Lever Mode.

Further information regarding the following features can be found in Section 5 - SET UP
PROCEDURES.

• Easily configured to a vessel’s control requirements.

• Push Button Set Up.
• Pluggable Connections.

Further information regarding the following feature can be found in Appendix B4 - DIAGNOSTIC
MENU.

• Visual system diagnostics, set up, and status indication.

Further information regarding the following featurse can be found in Appendix B5 - AUDIBLE
TONES.

• Audible system diagnostics and status indications.

1-3.2 Optional Processor Features

Further information regarding each optional feature can be found in Section 2 - OPERATION
"Optional Features".

• System failure external alarm contact.

•

• Backup Control System

• Clutch pressure interlock.
• Multiple Screw installations.
• Station Expander (SE).

Page 1-2
2 OPERATION

2 OPERATION
This Manual, as written, is intended for Single and Twin Screw applications only.

The Processor has the capability of controlling Triple, Quad and Quint Screw vessels. In order to do so,
contact your ZF Marine Electronics representative for the required information and materials.

2-1 DC Power On
When DC power is turned ON to the Processor:

• A short steady tone, followed by an intermittent tone, will sound at all Remote Stations
indicating that no station has command.
• The Start Interlock relay contact will remain open, preventing engine start.
• Throttle:
Electronic: The throttle signal will be commanded to Idle.
• Shift:

Solenoid: The Ahead and Astern shift solenoids will be de-energized, commanding Neutral.

• Troll:

Solenoid: The trolling valve solenoids are commanding lock-up.

2-2 Taking Command

The CruiseCommand Processor has four (4) Remote Station connectors available for pluggable Remote
Station Control Head connection. If more Remote Stations are required, refer to Section 8 - CONTROL
OPTIONS "Station Expander".

To take command at any one of the Remote Stations:

• Ensure all Control Head’s lever(s) at that Station are in the Neutral detent (vertical position).
Figure 1: Station taking Command

• Depress the transfer button for 1/2 second.

The Slow Repetitive tone will stop at all Stations, and the red LED indicator light will turn ON at the
Control Head of the Station that had assumed command of the Control System.
NOTE: If Start Interlock is used: Once a Station is in command the Start Interlock relay contact will close,
allowing the engine to start.

NOTE: Only one Station can have command at a time.

The Operator is now in control of the vessel’s screws.

WARNING: An Engine STOP Switch MUST be installed at every remote operating station. Refer to CFR 46,
Section 62.35-5 (US Coast Guard) and ABYC P-24.5.8.

Page 2-3
2 OPERATION

2-3 Basic Operation

2-3.1 Normal Operating Mode
A) The Control Head has three detents; Ahead, Astern and Neutral.
B) With the Control Head lever positioned in the Neutral (vertical) detent, the Processor will
command Neutral and the throttle at Idle revolutions per minute (RPM).
C) Movement of the Control Head’s lever 15 degrees to the Ahead or Astern detent will command
Ahead or Astern clutch engagement, while the engine RPM remains at Idle.

Figure 2: Control Head Detents

D) Further movement of the Control Head lever through the next 65 degrees, will increase the
engine RPM in proportion to the Control Head’s lever position.

2-3.2 Trolling Valve (optional)

WARNING: Personal injury could occur if the following steps are not followed exactly.

This Control System is able to control electric Trolling Valves that utilize single or dual solenoids.

This System has two Modes of Operation when a Troll Valve Type of command has been set up:
Troll and Non-Troll.

The Troll Mode option is selected during Set Up. When Troll Mode has been set up, the Control
System will initially power up in Non-Troll Mode.

2-3.2.1 Operation in Non-Troll Mode

During Non-Troll Mode the Trolling valve will remain locked up, or at maximum oil pressure
position. The System will work in Normal Operating Mode.

2-3.2.2 Operation in Troll Mode

2-3.2.2.1 Turn Troll ON

A) Position the Control Head lever (s) in the Neutral, Ahead, or Astern detent.
NOTE: If System is set for Twin Screw or more operation, ensure all Control Head levers are in the same
detent.

B) Press and hold the transfer button for two (2) seconds.
• The solid red indicator light on the Control Head will begin blinking
rapidly, indicating the system is now in Troll Mode.

Page 2-4
2 OPERATION

2-3.2.2.2 Operation
A) Once in Troll Mode, movement of the Control Head’s lever(s) to the Ahead or
Astern detent, will begin to rotate the propeller at approximately 30% of Idle
lock-up RPM.
• Transmission commands Ahead or Astern;
• Throttle remains in Idle;
• Control Head red LED flashing.
B) Continued Control Head lever movement through the Troll Range:
• Will increase the propeller RPM from 30% shaft RPM to approximately
70% shaft RPM;
• Throttle remains at Idle (or can be adjusted using L4 to increase up to 20%
of maximum throttle within this Troll Range).
• Control Head red LED becomes a steady light when the Control Head lever
reaches the end of the Troll Range.
C) The remaining movement of the Control Head lever beyond the Troll Range:
• Clutch locks up;
• Engine speed increases up to maximum throttle.

2-3.2.2.3 Turn Troll OFF

A) Place the Station-in-Command Control Head lever in the Neutral, Ahead, or
Astern detent.
B) Press and hold the transfer button until the red indicator light on the Control
Head changes (approximately 2 seconds) then release the button:
• When the red indicator light is a steady solid red, the Control system has
Troll Mode OFF.
• Clutch is locked-up.

2-4 Start Interlock (if used)

The engine start signal is blocked unless all of the following are true:

• DC power has been turned ON to the Control System.

• A Remote Station is in command.
• The Control System is commanding Neutral.

2-5 Station Transfer

WARNING: Personal Injury could occur if the following steps are not followed exactly.

Command can be transferred as follows:

A) The Station-in-Command’s lever(s) may be left in any position.

Page 2-5
2 OPERATION

B) Place the Control Head’s lever(s) of the receiving Station in the Neutral/Idle detent
position (refer to Figure 3:).
Figure 3: Remote Stations Before Transfer of Command Figure 4: Remote Station Transfer after Transfer of Command

C) At the Station taking command (Receiving Station), depress and hold the transfer button for
1/2 second (refer to Figure 4:).
• The red LED indicator light at the receiving Station’s Control Head will illuminate, indicating
that the Station has taken command.
• The red LED indicator light will go OFF at the transferring Station’s Control Head, indicating
that the Station no longer is in command.
D) The commanded positions of the Throttle and Clutch will remain unchanged for one second
after the red LED lights. This allows the operator time to move the Control Head’s lever(s) to a
position approximately matching the last Station, which will allow the vessel to maintain
present speed and direction.

2-6 Warm-up Mode (Throttle Only Mode)

WARNING: Personal Injury could occur if the following steps are not followed exactly.

This feature allows the operator to increase the engine’s RPM, while the Clutch remains in Neutral.
Warm-Up Mode is operational only when the Control Head lever is moved in the Ahead direction.

The system is placed into Warm-Up Mode as follows:

A) At the Station-in-Command, ensure that the Control Head’s lever is in the Neutral detent
position (refer to the following Figure).
B) Depress and hold the transfer button.
Figure 5: Control Head Warm-Up Mode
C) After one second, move the
Control Head’s lever to the
Ahead detent, while continuing
to hold the transfer button.

Figure 6: Control Head Normal Operating Mode

D) Now release the transfer button.

• The red LED indicator light will blink slowly, indicating Warm-Up Mode is activated and the
Clutch has remained at Neutral.
Page 2-6
2 OPERATION

E) The operator now can start the engine, if required, and increase the RPM through
the entire throttle range by moving the Control Head’s lever forward through the next 65
degrees.
F) When the Control Head’s lever is returned to the Neutral detent, the red LED will discontinue
blinking and remain lit steady. After one second in Neutral, the Processor will automatically
reset to normal operation with full control of the clutches and engine.
G) The next movement of the Control Head’s lever will engage the Ahead or Astern clutch
(Normal Operation).

2-7 High/Low Idle

The Control System provides the input to the engine, so that it may run at the standard Idle speed
(typically adjusted at the governor or carburetor), or it can provide a second elevated Idle speed.

2-7.1 Low Idle

• The factory default setting is for Low Idle Only.
• When the System is initially powered-up, it will always command Low Idle, even when High Idle
is selected.

2-7.2 High Idle

• If High Idle is desired, it may be programmed during Dock Trials.
• High Idle is programmable up to a maximum setting of 20% of Full Throttle.

2-7.3 Selecting Between High and Low Idle

WARNING: Personal Injury could occur if the following steps are not followed exactly.

Refer to the following Figure when selecting between Low and High Idle (or vice versa) at the
Station-in-Command.

A) The Control Head’s lever(s) may be in the Neutral, Ahead or Astern detents when
making a selection.
Figure 7: High/Low Idle Mode Selection

B) Depress and hold the transfer button for 1/2 second and then release.
• If the System was in Low Idle it will toggle to High Idle, and vice versa.
C) To return to the previous Idle setting, depress and hold the transfer button again for 1/2
second and then release.

2-8 Engine Synchronization (Multi Screw)

NOTE: The Control System offers two types of synchronization, Active or Equal Throttle.

The Control System will always power-up with synchronization ON.

Page 2-7
2 OPERATION

Synchronization is automatic and only operates when the Ahead clutch is engaged,
consequently it can be left ON full time.

When synchronization has been selected during set up, the Control System will always power-up with
synchronization ON.

In order for synchronization to become active (work toward synchronizing the engines' RPM's) the
Synchronization Criteria listed below must be met.

2-8.1 Synchronization Criteria

Synchronization Criteria is met when all of the following are true:

• Both Control Heads must be commanding 5% or greater of the throttle range.

• The commanded throttles are within a 10% window of one another.
• Both Control Head levers are commanding Ahead clutch engagement.

2-8.2 Synchronization Types

The following types of synchronization use the same criteria, indications, and are turned ON and
OFF as described in following Sections.

2-8.2.1 Equal Throttle Electronic Synchronization (default)

Equal Throttle synchronization simply has the Processors send the same or an equal throttle
command signal to the engines when the criteria has been met.

With Equal Throttle Synchronization the Processors do not receive Tachometer signals
representative of the Engine’s RPM’s.

CAUTION: The Control system will remain synchronized as long as the control Head’s levers are in close
proximity to one another. If a lever is moved to a point where the 10% throttle window is exceeded, a 10%
increase in engine RPM would occur with one engine, resulting in a sudden change in the vessel’s direction.
2-8.2.2 Active Synchronization
Active Synchronization must be enabled during Set Up and a Tachometer Sensor Wire
Harness must be used.

The Processors each receive a tachometer signal representing engine RPM from their
respective engines. These signals are compared with one another over a serial
communication line. If the Synchronization Criteria is met, the throttle command signal of
the engine(s) running at the higher RPM is lowered, until the RPM's of all engines match.

2-8.3 Synchronization Indications

The green LED located on the Control Head indicates the status of synchronization.

• When the green LED is lit steady, the engines are synchronized.
• When the green LED is not lit, the engines are not synchronized and the Control System is
not attempting to do so.
• The green LED blinks when the Control system is working toward synchronization.

2-8.4 Turning Synchronization OFF/ON when Criteria is Met

2-8.4.1 Turning OFF:

When the Criteria is met, synchronization is automatic and does not need to be turned ON. If
the operator elects to turn OFF synchronization, follow the steps below:

Page 2-8
2 OPERATION

A) Ensure that the Control Head's levers are positioned to a point where
Synchronization Criteria are met.
B) At the Station-in-Command, press and hold the transfer button until the green
LED blinks twice and then goes out (approximately 2 seconds).
C) Synchronization is now OFF.

2-8.4.2 Turning ON:

Synchronization is automatic and does not need to be turned ON, unless previously turned
OFF, as described in the previous Section.
A) Ensure that the Control Head's levers are positioned to a point where
Synchronization Criteria are met.
B) At the Station-in-Command, press and hold the transfer button until the green
LED lights (approximately 2 seconds).
• The green LED will blink as the system is working toward synchronization.
• The green LED will become solid when the engines are synchronized.

2-9 One Lever Mode (Multi Screw)

NOTE: One Lever Operation may be used in Troll Mode or in Non-Troll Mode.

NOTE: The Green LED will always be lit while in One Lever Operation, no matter which position the Master
Control Head lever is in.
The system supports a mode of operation referred to as One Lever Mode.

One Lever Mode allows the operator to control two to five engines and transmissions with a single Control
Head lever. Any of the Control Head levers at any Remote Station can be designated by the operator as
the Master lever.
The designation can be changed by the operator at any time. Most of the features (synchronization, troll,
etc.) available in normal operation are available while operating in One Lever Mode.

• The Processor defaults to One Lever Mode disabled.

• One Lever Mode can be disabled or enabled in the Set Up Procedures.
• When One Lever Mode is enabled, the operation must be turned ON and OFF as described
below.

WARNING: Personal Injury could occur if the following steps are not followed exactly.

2-9.1 Turning ON One Lever Operation

Figure 8: Step A) One Lever Operation Mode Figure 9: Step B) One Lever Operation Mode

A) At the Station-in-Command, move all the Control Head levers to the Ahead detent.

Page 2-9
2 OPERATION

B) Depress and Hold the transfer button while moving one of the Control Head levers
forward, out of the Ahead detent. Do Not Release the Transfer Button until the green LED
turns ON, indicating One Lever Operation is now active.
• The Control Head lever which the operator chose to move out of the Ahead detent,
becomes the Master lever.
• The Control Head lever which was left in the Ahead detent is now inactive.
NOTE: The Control Head lever(s) designated by the operator to be inactive in One Lever Operation, may be
left in the Ahead detent or moved fully forward. Moving the lever fully forward is recommended, because it
moves it out of the way and prevents accidental bumps while operating.

2-9.2 Turning OFF One Lever Operation

WARNING: It is strongly recommended that the Master lever be returned to the Neutral/Idle position prior to
turning OFF One Lever Operation.
• Do not attempt to transfer command from one Remote Station to another while in One Lever Operation.
Always turn One Lever Operation OFF prior to transferring.
• Failure to observe these recommendations may result in a sudden change in the vessel’s direction.

A) Place the Master lever into the Neutral detent.

B) Place all inactive Control Head levers into the Neutral detent.
• Whenever an inactive lever(s) is moved to the Neutral detent, One Lever Operation is
turned OFF for that lever ONLY!
• In applications with three or more screws, the green LED will not turn OFF until all
inactive Control Head levers are returned to the Neutral detent.

2-10 Optional Features

2-10.1 External Alarm Capability
• This optional feature is designed to provide a status signal to an external visual or audible alarm
circuit.
• The status signal is in the form of an OPEN or CLOSED relay contact. When the contact is
CLOSED, the Processor is functioning normally. When the contact OPENS, this indicates the
software program has quit running due to a component failure or loss of DC power.
• A full explanation is provided in Section 8 - CONTROL OPTIONS.

2-10.2 Auxiliary Backup Control System

The Backup Control System (BU Sys) provides a control system which is fully independent from the
ZF Marine Electronics Control System. The BU Sys can control the transmission as well as the
engine, but it does not include ZF Marine Electronics control logic, safety interlock, and timing
circuits. In other words, there is no protection for operator errors, such as shifting into gear at
elevated rpm’s.
If this option is going to be used, please contact a ZF Marine Electronics Representative for further
information.

2-10.3 Clutch Pressure Interlock

• The purpose of the Clutch Pressure Interlock is to prevent high engine RPM when the Clutch is
not fully engaged.
• A full explanation is provided in Section 8 - CONTROL OPTIONS.

Page 2-10
2 OPERATION

2-10.4 Multiple Screw Installations

This Manual, as written, is intended for Single and Twin Screw applications only.

The Processor has the capability of controlling Triple, Quad and Quint Screw vessels. In order to do
so, contact your ZF Marine Electronics representative for the required information and materials.

2-10.5 Station Expander (SE)

• The SE is a separate Processor housed in an enclosure that allows the connection of up to five
additional Remote Control Stations.
• The SE communicates with the Processor over the serial communication line.
• A full explanation of the installation, operation and adjustment of the SE is provided in the
Installation Manual provided with the SE.

If this option is going to be used, please contact a ZF Marine Electronics Representative for further
information.

Page 2-11
3 PLAN THE INSTALLATION

3 PLAN THE INSTALLATION

NOTE: ZF Marine Electronics recommends that the system be installed in accordance with ABYC, E-11 and
P24.

3-1 System Requirements

The first step when installing a System is to carefully plan the installation. This includes finding proper
mounting locations for the Processor(s) and Control Heads. The decision must be made on where power
is going to be sourced and how the power will be routed to the Processor(s).

Once the locations have been decided, lengths of electrical wiring and Harnesses must be determined.

Figure 10: Processor

The Processor receives the variable DC voltage from the

Control Head(s) and converts these inputs to the appropriate
electronic or electric outputs at the correct time and sequence
to the Governor and Gear Box. The information regarding
throttle type, throttle/gear sequencing, etc., are all stored on
memory within the Processor.

Only when the locations and lengths of wiring/harnesses have been determined, should you start the
actual installation. The following sections describe the requirements for installing the components and
selecting mounting locations.

3-1.1 Processor(s)
Processors required per engine:

Single Screw: One (1) Processor

Twin Screw: Two (2) Processors

Mounting Hardware is installer supplied.

Installation/Troubleshooting Manual is included with the Processor.

The following items must be taken into account when selecting the location for the Processor(s):

• The Processor is spray proof, but not water proof. Therefore, an area must be selected that
typically stays dry.
• The engine room is the preferred location for mounting the Processor.
• If the engine room is too small, locate in any area where it is easily accessible, as long as all
of the criteria listed are met.
• Bulkhead mounting is the preferred method due to ease of access for wiring and
adjustments. However, the Processor can be mounted in any attitude as long as the
Display LED window and push buttons are accessible.
• Do not mount the Processor on the engine, transmission, or in any location that will subject
it to excessive vibration.

Page 3-12
3 PLAN THE INSTALLATION

• Do not mount the Processor to the transom when the vessel is equipped with a
surface piercing drive system (due to vibration concerns).
• Locate the Processor(s) away from sources of high heat, such as engine exhaust manifolds
or turbochargers. Allow 4 feet (1,2m) of clearance or more.
• Do not mount the Processor(s) in close proximity to gas engine ignition systems,
alternators, generators or any equipment producing strong magnetic fields. Allow 4 feet
(1,2m) clearance or more.
CAUTION: Strong magnetic fields can influence the Processor’s electronic circuits and void your
warranty.

• Grounding (Bonding) is required for maximum electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

performance. A threaded hole is provided for connection to the vessel’s grounding system.

3-1.2 Control Head(s)

Refer to Appendix A - Control Head Variations Service Sheets for information on the various
Control Heads available and their dimensions.

• Control Heads are available with pluggable pigtails or may be hard-wired (no pigtails).
• Retrofit applications may require an Adapter Pad to cover the old Control Head cutout. A
variety of Adapters and Cover Pads are available. If an Adapter/Cover Pad is required,
please contact a ZF Marine Electronics Representative for further information.
• The Control Head can be mounted at any location on the vessel, as long as all of the criteria
listed above are met.
• A HandHeld is available to use, instead of a mounted Control Head. Refer to the
Installation Manual supplied with the HandHeld for additional information on the
planning of the installation.
• Ensure that the clearance is sufficient for the Control Head’s lever to reach full Ahead and
full Astern.
• The 400 and MC2000 Series Control Heads are spray proof from the top, but must be
protected from the weather on the underside.
• When a 400 or MC2000 Series Control Head must be mounted in a location where the
underside may be exposed to the weather, consider using a Weather Mount Enclosure.
Refer to the Appendix A - Weather Mount for specific information.
• The 700 Series Control Heads are fully water proof.

3-1.3 Wire Harnesses

For further information regarding Wire Harness requirements, contact a ZF Marine Electronics
Representative.

The following lists the various Harnesses that plug into the Processor:

Table 2: is a general list of Wire Harnesses available for CruiseCommand. Not all of the harnesses
may be used on every system. The use of the harness depends on the features being used on the
vessel. All Harnesses are available from ZF Marine Electronics, LLC.

Page 3-13
3 PLAN THE INSTALLATION

Station 2, Station 3, Station 4, Pulse, and Serial connectors on the Processor are sealed
with plugs at the factory. If the connectors are to be used, remove and discard these plugs. Every
connector should either have a Wire Harness or plug. Do not leave a connector empty.

Table 2: Processor Harness Connector Locations

No. Description

1 Throttle Harness
2 3
1 2 Power/Start Interlock/Clutch Pressure (optional)/
Alarm Circuit (optional) Harness

3 Clutch Wire Harness or Clutch/Troll Wire Harness (or

6 optional MAN with Troll or MAN without Troll Wire
Harness)
4
4 Control Head Wire Harness

5 Serial Communication Wire Harness (Multi Screw)

5
6 (Pulse) Tachometer Sensor Wire Harness (Multi Screw
using Active Synchronization only)

Figure 11: Harness Plug Connectors Figure 12: Processor Connector and Harness Plug Keying
Processor Harness

Connector
Keying

11573B

The Harnesses use one or both of the plug connector types detailed in Figure 11:.

When connecting the plugs, ensure that the release button or buttons are depressed and held until
plug is fully connected or disconnected.
Ensure the harness plug connector is in the appropriate orientation, using the keying on the
connectors, before connecting to the Processor.

Connecting or disconnecting plugs without depressing and holding the release button or buttons
will damage the plug.

3-1.3.1 Control Head Harnesses

• One Control Head Harness is required for every Control Head lever at every Remote
Station.
• The Control Head Harnesses are available in various lengths.
• Harnesses are available with plugs on both ends or a plug on the Processor end only.
• The Harness from the Port side of a Control Head is always routed to the Port Processor.
• The Harness from the Starboard side of a Control Head is always routed to the Starboard
Processor.

3-1.3.2 Power, Start Interlock, Clutch Pressure (optional), Alarm (optional) Harness
• One Harness required per Processor.
• The Harness is plugged at the Processor end only.

Page 3-14
3 PLAN THE INSTALLATION

• In addition to the required DC power and Start Interlock, the Harness has options
for Clutch Oil Pressure Switch and External Alarm Circuit that are available.
• All of the cables in the Harness are the same length. Therefore, order a length that will
reach all of the previously mentioned items, if required.
• The Harness is available in lengths up to 30 feet (9,14m) for 12 VDC systems, and up to 60
feet (18,2m) for 24 VDC systems.

3-1.3.3 Serial Communication Harness

The Serial Communication Harness is only required in:

• Multi Screw applications,

The Harness interconnects the Processors to each other. A plug is attached at both ends of
the Serial Harness.

Twin Screw:
One (1) Serial Harness (part no. 13316-X)

3-1.4 Additional Harnesses

For further information regarding Wire Harness requirements, contact a ZF Marine Electronics
Representative.

The following lists the additional Harnesses that plug into the Processor:

3-1.4.4 Clutch Harness

• One Harness required per Processor.
• The Harness consists of 3 two-conductor cables for Ahead and Astern Clutch Solenoids and
Clutch Power.

3-1.4.5 Clutch/Troll Harness

• One Harness required per Processor.
• The Harness consists of:
2 two-conductor cables for Ahead and Astern Clutch Solenoids.

2 two-conductor cables for Troll ON/OFF and Troll Proportional Solenoids.

NOTE: Some transmissions only utilize one solenoid for troll, therefore, the harness would consist of only
three cables.

1 two-conductor cables for Power.

• The Power for the clutches and troll are supplied by the Processor’s power source.
• All of the cables in the Harness are the same length. Therefore, order a length that will
reach all of the previously mentioned items, if required.

3-1.4.6 Throttle Harness

• One Harness required per Processor.
• There are 4 types of Throttle Harnesses: Voltage, Current, PWM (Pulse Width Modulation),
and Frequency.
• Most Throttle Harnesses are plugged at the Processor side only.
• Some Throttle harness types are available with plugs on both ends.

Page 3-15
3 PLAN THE INSTALLATION

3-1.4.7 Tach Sensor Harness

There are two Tach Sensor Harnesses available:

1 The first is the AC Coupled Sensor Harness, which is designed for inputs from items
such as Mechanical Senders, Magnetic Pickup Sensors, the Alternator AC Stator
Terminal or the negative Coil Terminal.
2 The second Harness is designed for Active Sensors with an Open Collector output, such
as Hall Effect Sensors.
• This Harness is only required when Active Synchronization is required.
• One Harness per Processor is required.
• The Harness is plugged on one end only.

Determine the source of the tachometer signal, which can be provided by a mechanical
tachometer sender, magnetic pickup, alternator’s pre-rectified output, the negative side of the
coil (gasoline engine) or an engine’s electronically produced signal. Refer to Engine
Tachometer Sender Requirements located in Appendix A.

3-2 Tachometer Sensors

There are two types of Tachometer Sensors available through ZF Marine Electronics, Mechanical (p/n
8902) and Magnetic Pickup (p/n 8912). Both types provide two separate outputs, one for the tachometer(s)
and the second output provides the Processor’s tachometer signal requirement. If a sensor other than one
supplied by ZF Marine Electronics is used, it must meet the criteria provided below for each type:

3-2.1 AC Coupled Sensors

• The signal must have a minimum amplitude of +/- 1.5 V (3.0 V P-P).
• The signal’s maximum amplitude must not exceed +/- 100 V (200 V P-P).
• The frequency of the signal must be no lower than 30 Hz at Idle.
• The signal’s frequency may not exceed 8 KHz at Full Throttle.

3-2.2 Alternator
• The pre-rectified stator AC terminal may be used as the tach source.
• The signal is inputted to the AC Coupled Sensor input.
• The signal must meet the same criteria as any AC Coupled Sensor Signal (refer to Section 3-2.1).

3-2.3 Point side of the Coil

• When the signal is sourced from the coil or an electronically produced tach signal (used on some
gasoline engines) the signal is connected to the AC Coupled Sensor input.
• The signal must meet the same criteria as any AC Coupled Sensor Signal (refer to Section 3-2.1).

3-2.4 Active Sensors (Open Collector Output)

• The sink current ability of the Sensor may be no lower than 2 mA.
• The operational current may not exceed 50 mA.
• The Sensor must have a maximum saturation voltage of 0.8 V.
• An operational voltage requirement of 9- 10 VDC.
• A minimum frequency of 5 Hz at Idle.
• A maximum frequency of 8 KHz at Full Throttle.

Page 3-16
3 PLAN THE INSTALLATION

3-3 Installer Supplied Tools And Parts

3-3.1 Required Tools

Screwdriver – medium Phillips, #2.

Wire cutter, stripper & crimper (Thomas & Betts model WT-2000 or equivalent).

Saw with blade suitable for Console Top Panel.

Drill Motor with 9/32 inch and 7/32 inch drill bits.

Hole saw - 1 inch (25,4mm)

3-3.2 Optional Tools

Calibrated Digital Multimeter (Fluke 80 Series or equivalent).

Service Field Test Unit (P/N 13927, available through ZF Marine Electronics)

Field Test Control Head - Dual (P/N 14000)

3-3.3 Engine Stop Switch

An engine STOP switch MUST be located at each Remote Station.

WARNING: An Engine STOP Switch MUST be installed at every remote operating station. Refer to CFR 46,
Section 62.35-5 (US Coast Guard) and ABYC P-24.5.8.

3-4 DC Power Source

One of the most important (and often overlooked) items for proper operation of your control system is a
clean, dedicated, and reliable source of DC Power.
The wiring used to supply power from the power source (battery) through the various components (fuses,
distribution panel, relays, etc.) to the Processors must be sized for a voltage drop of 10% or less using 10
amps as the maximum current draw. Refer to ABYC Standard E-11, Table X to determine the appropriate
wire gauge for the necessary conductor length.

When using ZF Marine Electronics supplied 14 gauge power cable, and in accordance with ABYC
Standard E-11, the distance from a 12 volt power source (battery or DC Distribution Panel) shall not
exceed 30 feet (9,1m). In 24 volt systems, the maximum cable length is 60 feet (18,2m).

ZF Marine Electronics highly recommends using an Automatic Power Selector (APS) and a second power
source (battery) to supply power to each Processor. Refer to Appendix A - Automatic Power Selector (APS)
for examples of power supplies.

3-4.1 Processor Power

The items listed below will help ensure optimum performance from your control system.

• The Processor requires a battery source of 12 or 24 VDC.

• Two 5 ampere (when isolated power supplies are required) or one 10 ampere trip-free
thermal circuit breaker(s) with manual ON/OFF actuation
• The use of an APS (Automatic Power Selector) is strongly recommended.
• Power should come from the vessel’s DC Distribution Panel.
• The cables feeding power from the battery to the Processor must be sized large enough to
keep voltage drop, due to current flow, below 10%. Reference Appendix A - Automatic
Power Selector (APS) .
Page 3-17
3 PLAN THE INSTALLATION

Contact a ZF Marine Electronics representative for the Processor’s power cable(s)

maximum lengths. Refer to Appendix A - Automatic Power Selector for examples of the various
wiring options. Ultimately, it is the boat builder or installer’s responsibility to ensure that the
vessel’s wiring meets the requirements of American Boating & Yachting Council standard E-11, for
AC and DC Electrical Systems on Boats.

3-4.2 Clutch Power

The power for the Clutch Solenoids may come from the same or different power source as
Processor power if isolation is required. The Clutch Power Supply cable and the Processor DC
Power Supply cables may come from the same 10 amp circuit breaker or in the case of isolated
power, from two separate 5 amp circuit breakers. Refer to Appendix C - System Drawings for actual
requirements.

Page 3-18
4 INSTALLATION

4 INSTALLATION
NOTE: Before starting the actual installation of the Control System, make sure you have the correct parts and
tools on hand. Refer to Section 3 - PLAN THE INSTALLATION. Read ALL the instructions pertinent to each
part before beginning the installation of the part.

NOTE: When connecting the plugs, ensure that the release buttons are depressed and held until plug is fully
connected. To disconnect the plugs, the release buttons MUST be held depressed until plug is disconnected.

NOTE: When installing the harness cable, support the cables using clamps or straps not more than 18 inches
(0,5m) apart, unless contained in a conduit. Install each cable so it is protected from physical damage. Refer
to ABYC Standard.

4-1 Processor
Figure 13: Processor Dimensions

A) Place the Processor on the mounting surface and mark the three (3) screw holes.
B) Remove Processor and drill the screw holes.
C) Secure the Processor to the mounting surface with three 1/4 inch or M6 fasteners.
D) Connect the Processor to the Hull or Grounding Bus by running a 12 AWG or larger wire between the
Processor’s threaded grounding hole and the Grounding Bus. (The Processor is grounded if mounted
directly to a metallic surface that is connected to a metal hull) (Refer to Appendix A - Grounding)

4-2 Control Head(s)

4-2.1 400, MC2000 and 700 Series Control Heads

Refer to the appropriate Control Head Dimensions and Variations Service Sheet in Appendix A for
installation.

NOTE: The one connector Control Head harness requires a modification at the Control Head connections.
Refer to the Appendix A - Control Head Sheet’s 7-conductor Control Head connections.

4-2.2 500 Series Control Heads

Refer to the Installation Manual supplied with the 500 Series Control Head Assembly for
installation instructions.

4-2.3 Handheld Remote Controls

Refer to the Installation Manual supplied with the Handheld Remote for installation instructions.

Page 4-19
4 INSTALLATION

4-3 Wire Harness Installation

Four different styles of plugs and connectors are utilized but are inserted in an identical fashion as follows:

4-3.1 Harness Plug Insertion and Extraction

A) Prior to inserting the Harness plug, pay close attention to the number of pins and the keying of
the plug. The plug is designed to be inserted one way only into the connector, but can be
incorrectly forced together in the opposite orientation.
B) When connecting the plugs, ensure that the locking mechanisms are depressed and held until
the plug is fully connected or disconnected.

4-3.2 Standard Control Head Harness

Depending on whether a pluggable or hard-wired (not pluggable) Control Head(s) is selected, will
determine the procedure for terminating the Harness at the Remote Station.

• The first installation procedure is written for the pluggable Control Head(s).
• If a hard-wired Control Head(s) is selected, follow the information provided in the second
procedure.

IMPORTANT: The distance of the Control Head from the Processor is limited to the length of an
UNINTERRUPTED Harness. This cable should NEVER be spliced.

NOTE: Multi Screw, Control Heads must be connected to the same numbered Station on all Processors.

4-3.2.1 Control Head Harness with Two Connectors

A) At the Port Processor, insert the plug into the STATION 1 connector.
B) Run the cable to the Control Head located at Station 1.
C) Insert the Harness plug into the Control Head’s Port pigtail plug.
D) Ensure that the cable has a strain relief close to the Control Head to relieve the strain on
the connections.
E) Repeat Steps A) thru D) for the Starboard Processor.
F) Repeat Steps A) thru E) with the rest of the Remote Stations.

NOTE: When Stations 3, 4 and 5 are to be installed, they each require the removal of the watertight seal
located on the Processor enclosure in the Station cable entry holes.

4-3.2.2 Control Head Harness with One Plug

A) At the Port Processor, insert the plug into the STATION 1 connector.
B) Run the cable to the Port side of the Control Head located at Station 1.
C) Connect the conductors to the Control Head as described in the appropriate Control
Head Dimensions and Variations Service Sheet in Appendix A.
D) Provide a strain relief in close proximity to the Control Head’s terminal block.
E) Repeat Steps A) thru D) for the Starboard Processor.
F) Repeat steps A) thru E) with the rest of the Remote Stations.

NOTE: When Stations 3, 4 and 5 are to be installed, they each require the removal of the watertight seal
located on the Processor enclosure in the Station cable entry holes.

Page 4-20
4 INSTALLATION

4-3.3 Standard Power/Start Interlock/Alarm(optional)/Clutch Pressure Switch(optional)

Harness

The Power Harness has a minimum of two cables (DC Power and Start Interlock) and may have two
more optional cables (Clutch Pressure Interlock and External Alarm Circuit).

This Harness has one plug, which is inserted in the Processor’s POWER connector.
CAUTION: The most common source of trouble is loose wiring connections.
• Verify wiring connectors are properly crimped and cannot be pulled out.
• Crimps and connections must be made to conductor wire, NOT to the wire insulation.
• Verify all screwed wire connections are secure.

Continue with the following Sections that apply to this application.

4-3.3.1 DC Power Cable

WARNING: When connecting the Power Harness to the Processor, be sure the power is OFF

It is critical to design and wire the Control system in a manner which provides the cleanest
power source possible. This can be accomplished by providing two power sources, along with
an APS. The preferred system is a dedicated circuit with no other accessories or functions.
(Refer to Appendix A - Automatic Power Selector)

A) Run the cable labeled POWER to the DC Distribution Panel or the optional
Power Relay.
B) Strip back the appropriate amount of PVC jacketing and conductor insulation.
C) Crimp the appropriate connectors to the conductors.
D) Terminate the conductors to the DC Power Source.

4-3.3.2 Start Interlock Cable

CAUTION: The Processor is designed for a maximum of 5 amperes, maximum 50 volt, start signal current.
Greater current will damage the interlock circuit.

Figure 14: Start Interlock Connections

A) Run the cable labeled START INTERLOCK to the
Engine’s Starter Solenoid.
B) Disconnect the Starter Switch wire from the
Solenoid.
C) Strip back the appropriate amount of PVC
jacketing and conductor insulation.
D) Connect one of the conductors to the Solenoid’s
Starter Switch terminal.
E) Butt splice the second wire to Starter Switch
wire.

4-3.3.3 External Alarm Circuit (optional)

Refer to Section 8 - CONTROL OPTIONS, for installation information.

4-3.3.4 Clutch Pressure Switch (optional)

Refer to Section 8 - CONTROL OPTIONS, for installation information.

Page 4-21
4 INSTALLATION

4-3.4 Serial Communication Harness (Multi Screw)

The CruiseCommand System’s default method of synchronization is "Equal Throttle". With this
type of synchronization the Processors ensure that the SAME or an EQUAL Throttle Command
Signal is applied to both governors when the Synchronization Criteria has been met. Though this is
not "true" Synchronization, in most cases it is very effective.

If "true" Synchronization is required, or requested, "Active" Synchronization would need to be

selected during SET UP. "Active" Synchronization requires a tachometer signal representative of
each engines’ RPM. The frequency of these signals are measured and changes to the Processor’s
throttle command signal outputs are made until all engines are running at the same RPM.

4-3.4.1 Twin Screw Serial Communication (Required for both Synchronization Types)
A) At the Processors, remove the watertight plug-in cap from the SERIAL connector and
discard.
B) At the Port Processor, insert the Serial harness’s plug into the SERIAL connector.
C) Run the harness to the Starboard Processor.
D) Insert the plug into the Starboard Processor’s SERIAL connector.
E) Secure the Serial Harness at least every 18 in. (45,72 cm).

4-3.4.2 Tachometer Sensor (Required for Active Synchronization Only)

A) At the Processors, remove the watertight plug-in cap from the PULSE connector and
discard.
B) At the Port Processor, insert the Tach Sensor harness’s plug into the PULSE connector.
C) Run the Port Tach Sensor Harness cable to the Tach signal source of the Port engine.
D) Connect the conductors to the Port Tach source as indicated by the Engine
Manufacturer’s documentation. Keep in mind that some sources are polarity sensitive.
(black wire - negative, red wire - positive)
E) Repeat B) through D) for the Starboard side.

4-3.5 Additional Harnesses

4-3.5.1 Throttle Harness

IMPORTANT: Ensure all Processors are using the same kind of Wire Harness and that it matches the Engine
Selection to be applied in Section 5 - SET UP PROCEDURES.
The Processor connects directly to the engine interface using a Throttle Wire Harness.

A) Connect the plug end of the Harness into the THROTTLE connector at the
Processor.
B) Run the cable to the appropriate engine interface. (Example: Port to Port, etc.)
C) Refer to the engine documentation for termination points at the engine
interface.
D) Repeat steps A) thru C) on all Processors.

4-3.5.2 Clutch Harness

The Clutch Harness is supplied with three (3) or four (4) cables extending from the plug. One
cable is supplied for each of the following:

Page 4-22
4 INSTALLATION

• Ahead Clutch solenoid

• Astern Clutch solenoid
• Power
• Neutral Clutch solenoid (optional)
A) Insert the Clutch Harness plug into the CLUTCH connector on the Processor. (Example:
Port to Port, etc.)
B) Run all the cables, except the one labeled POWER, to the appropriate transmission.
C) Refer to the Transmission documentation for termination at the solenoids.

4-3.5.3 Clutch/Troll Harness

The Clutch/Troll Harness is supplied with three (3) or or more of the following cables:

• Ahead Clutch solenoid (Refer to "Clutch Harness" Section)

• Astern Clutch solenoid (Refer to "Clutch Harness" Section)
• Power (Refer to "Clutch Harness" Section)
• Neutral Clutch solenoid (optional) (Refer to "Clutch Harness" Section)
• Troll Command solenoid
• Troll ON/OFF solenoid
A) Insert the Clutch/Troll Harness plug into the CLUTCH connector on the Processor.
B) Run all the cables, except the one labeled POWER, to the appropriate transmission.
C) Refer to the Transmission documentation for termination at the solenoids.

4-4 Engine Stop Switches

An engine stop switch(s) must be located at all Remote Stations and capable of stopping the engine at any
RPM.
The Installer supplies the Stop Switches. Refer to the installation instruction supplied with the switch and
the engine installation instructions for manufacturers recommendations.
WARNING: An Engine Stop Switch at each Remote Station is an absolute requirement. Refer to CFR 46,
SEC. 62.35-5 and ABYC P-24.5.8.

Page 4-23
5 SET UP PROCEDURE

5 SET UP PROCEDURE
The Processor utilizes push buttons in conjunction with Display LED’s to program, adjust, calibrate and set up
the various features. The push buttons also allow you to access and display information regarding the health of
the System.

The following paragraphs explain how to locate and use the push buttons and Display LEDs:

5-1 Processor Components Used In Set Up

Figure 15: Processor Display LED and Arrow Each Processor has a Display LED and Arrow Push Buttons located
Push Buttons
on the front cover. (Refer to Figure 15:)

• The Display LED is to view the Function Codes and

Values. It consists of four 7-segment display pads.
• The Arrow Push Buttons are used to scroll through and
select the Function Codes, and set the Values.

5-1.1 Processor Display LED

Figure 16: Display LED at Normal • The Processor’s Display LED has four 7-segment LED’s, which light up to
Operation show either letters or numbers.
• The Display LED during Normal operation has running red center dash lines
(Figure 16:)
• The first two digit Display LED’s to the left, indicate the Function Code,
which is alphanumeric.
Figure 17: Display LED Designations • The second two digit Display LED’s indicate the numeric Value that is
currently programmed into the Processor for the Function Code displayed to
the left.
• A decimal point indicator is located on the bottom right corner of each
Display LED. (Figure 17:)

5-1.2 Push Buttons

Figure 18: Arrow Push Buttons There are four Push Buttons with arrows located below the Display LED on
the Processor cover. These push buttons are used to scroll through, select,
and store the Functions and Values. The direction of the arrow indicates
"Left", "Down", "Up", and "Right".

5-1.2.1 "Up" and "Down" Push Buttons

Pressing the "Up" or "Down" Push Buttons once has the following functions:
• Stops Normal Operation Display (running red center dash lines) and activates the
Function Menu.
• While in the Function Menu, scrolls through the Function Codes one at a time.
• When in Set Up Mode, increases (Up) or decreases (Down) the Function Value
one digit at a time.
• When an Error Code is displayed, scrolls through the error messages one at a
time.

NOTE: Refer to Appendix B - TROUBLESHOOTING ERROR CODES for steps to be taken for Error Messages.

Page 5-24
5 SET UP PROCEDURE

5-1.2.2 "Left" and "Right" Push Buttons

Pressing and holding the "Left" and "Right" Push Buttons at the same time has the following
functions:
• Activates Set Up Mode as indicated by the blinking Display LED. (Operator must
hold the buttons down until the blinking begins, then release.)
• While in Set Up Mode, deactivates Set Up Mode, saves the displayed Value to
memory, and returns to the Function Menu. (Operator must hold the buttons
down until the blinking stops, then release.)

5-1.2.3 "Left "Push Button Only

Pressing the "Left" Push Button once has the following functions:
• Deactivates Set Up Mode WITHOUT any changes to the Function Value stored in
memory. (Operator must hold the button down until function code stops blinking,
then release.) The previously saved Function Value will then be displayed.
Figure 19: Error Menu Example • While in Function Menu, changes the Display LED to the Error Menu, if any
errors are present. (has no effect if there are no errors stored)
• While in the Error Menu, changes the Display LED back to the Function Menu.

5-1.2.4 "Right" Push Button Only

Pressing the "Right" Push Button once has the following function:

• While in the Error Menu, clears inactive errors. (Active errors blink, inactive do
not)
Pressing and holding the "Right" Push Button has the following function:
Figure 20: Display LED Four Digit Value
• While in Set Up Mode, or Function Menu,
allows the Function Value of the current
Function Code to be displayed with all four
Display LEDs.

5-2 Activating Set Up Mode

NOTE: To Escape from the Set Up procedure at any time without saving the changed value to memory,
depress the "Left" Arrow Push Button once. The Function Code will stop flashing and the Function will be
saved with the original Value.

A) The Display LED is in Normal operating condition with the running red center dash lines.
B) Depressing either the "Up" or "Down" Arrow Push Button will ACTIVATE the Function Menu.
C) Depressing the "Up" or "Down" Arrow Push Button will SCROLL through the Function Menu
Function Codes, one at a time.
D) Once the desired Function Code is visible on the Display LED, press and hold the "Left" and "Right"
Arrow Push Buttons at the same time, until the Function Code begins to blink. This will activate Set
Up Mode.
E) Depressing the "Up" Arrow Push Button will INCREASE the Value of the Function, while pressing the
"Down" Arrow Push Button will DECREASE the Value of the Function. (Pressing and holding the
"Up" or "Down" Arrow Push Button will INCREASE or DECREASE the Function Value rapidly.)

Page 5-25
5 SET UP PROCEDURE

5-3 Storing Values To Memory

Once the desired Value has been reached in Set Up Mode, the Value is stored to memory as follows:

A) Depress and hold the "Left" and "Right" Arrow push buttons until the Function Code stops
blinking.
• The new Value is now programmed into memory.
• Set Up Mode is exited.
B) Depress the "Up" or "Down" Arrow Push Button until the next required Function Code is
reached.
C) Reactivate Set Up Mode. Refer to Section 5-2.
NOTE: If no Push Buttons are pressed for five (5) minutes, the selected Mode of operation is automatically
exited and the System returns to Normal Operating Mode. If no Push Buttons are pressed for five (5) minutes
while in Set Up Mode, it will be exited without the changes stored to memory

5-4 Function Codes And Values

The following tables list the Function Codes’ Name, Default Value and Range or available Options. Each
of the Function Codes are explained in further detail in the following sections.
NOTE:
SINGLE SCREW APPLICATIONS: The Function Values may be entered and stored in any order.
MULTI SCREW APPLICATIONS: The A1 Function must be set FIRST, and the A0 Function must be set
SECOND. The rest of the Function Values may be entered and stored in any order.

Once these parameters are set, either cycle power to the Processors or wait five (5) minutes, before continuing
set up.

CAUTION: If ZF Hurth Gears are used, set the L1 parameter as the next setting AFTER the A1 and A0
parameters have been set.

NOTE: Once these parameters are set, either cycle power to the Processors or wait five (5) minutes, before
continuing set up.

Table 3: Processor Function Codes

Function Code Function Name Default Value Value Range or Options

A0 Processor Identification 01 01, 02, 03, 04, 05

SET FUNCTION A0 AFTER THE A1 FUNCTION CODE HAS BEEN SET. Each Processor MUST have a unique Processor ID #.

A1 Number of Engines 01 01, 02, 03, 04, 05

IN MULTI SCREW APPLICATIONS, THE A1 FUNCTION CODE IS TO BE THE FIRST (1ST) PARAMETER SET.

IMPORTANT: If ZF Hurth Gears are used, set the L1 parameter after A1 and A0.

A2 One Lever Operation 00 00 - Disabled

01 - Enabled

A3 Station Expander (SE) 00 00 - Disabled

01 - Enabled

DO NOT ADJUST THE ABOVE FUNCTION! Leave at default Value set by the Factory. Contact a ZF Marine Electronics
Authorized Technician if this Function requires adjustment.
Page 5-26
5 SET UP PROCEDURE

A4 Neutral Indication Tone 00 00 - No Tone

01 - Tone upon Control Head engaging Neutral
02 - Tone upon Transmission shifting to Neutral

Table 4: Electric Throttle Function Codes

Function Code Function Name Default Value Value Range or Options

E0 Engine Throttle Profile 06 1 - Caterpillar (PWM) (8 to 92%)
02 - Cummins Centry (Voltage)(0.9 to 4.5 VDC)
03 - Cummins Quantum(Voltage)(0.9 to 1.2- 4.0 VDC)
04 - Detroit Diesel (Voltage) (0.64 to 4.65 VDC)
05 - MTU or MAN (Current) (4.0 to 20.0 mA)
06 - Scania (Voltage) (0.42 to 2.95 VDC)
07 - John Deere (Voltage) (0.5 to 4.5 VDC)
08 - Volvo (Voltage) (0.6 to 3.6 VDC)
09 - Detroit Diesel 1800 (Frequency)(120.64 to 360.9 Hz)
10 - Detroit Diesel 2300 (Frequency) (120.64 to 463.5 Hz)
** DEFAULT BASED ON THROTTLE PROFILE SELECTED.
E1 Throttle in Neutral ** 01.0% to 25.0% of Throttle Range
[Throttle Range = Throttle Max (E3) - Throttle Min (E2)
E2 Throttle Minimum ** 1.0% to 97.0%
Must be 3% or more below Throttle Maximum (E3)
E3 Throttle Maximum ** 04.0% to 100.0% of Maximum Throttle Allowable.
Must be 3% or more above Throttle Minimum (E2)

E4 Throttle Maximum Astern 100.0 01.0 to 100.0% of Throttle Maximum (E3)

E5 Throttle Pause Following Shift 00.5 00.0 to 05.0 Seconds

E6 High Idle 00.0 00.0 to 20.0% of Throttle Maximum (E3).

E7 Active Synchronization 00. 00 – Disabled

01 - Enabled

Table 5: Clutch Function Codes

Function Code Function Name Default Value Value Range or Options

C0 Clutch Pressure Interlock 00 00 – Not Installed

01 – Installed
02 – Throttle Clutch Pressure Interlock Mode

C1 Clutch Interlock Delay 01.0 00.5 to 10.0 Seconds

C2 Proportional (Reversal) Pause 00 00 – In-Gear;

01 – Neutral

C3 Proportional (Reversal) Pause 03 00 to 99 Seconds

Time

C4 Proportional (Reversal) Pause 00 00 – 2:1 Ahead to Astern vs. Astern to Ahead

Ratio 01 – 1:1 Ahead to Astern vs. Astern to Ahead

Table 6: Trolling Valve Function Codes

Function Code Function Name Default Value Value Range or Options

L0 Troll Enable and Control Head 00 00 – No Troll
Troll Lever Range 01 – 20 Degrees- Type 1
02 – 35 Degrees- Type 2
03 – 45 Degrees- Type 3 (Throttle limited to 75% of
Throttle Range)

The following L1 parameter MUST be the THIRD Function set if ZF Hurth Gears are used.

Page 5-27
5 SET UP PROCEDURE

L1 Troll Valve Function 00 00 - Normal, (No Current when at Lock-up)

01 - Inverse (No Current when at Lock-up)
02 - Normal (Maximum Current when at Lock-up) Preset
for ZF220-550, 12VDC Systems.
03 - Normal (No Current when at Lock-up)
Preset for ZF220-550, 24VDC Systems.
04 - Normal (No Current when at Lock-up)
Preset for ZF2000, 24 VDC Systems.
05 - Inverse (No Current when at Lock-up)
Preset for ZF600, 1900 and 2500, 24VDC Systems.
06 - Preset for 12VDC ZF Hurth Systems with two (2)
proportional solenoids.
07 - Preset for 24VDC ZF Hurth Systems with two (2)
proportional solenoids

L2 Troll Minimum Pressure 10.0 01.0 to 99.0% Must be at least 1% more or less
Troll Maximum (L3) [DEPENDING on whether Normal or
Inverse is selected].

L3 Troll Maximum Pressure 10.0 02.0% to 100.0% Must be at least 1% more or less
than Troll Minimum. (L2) [DEPENDING on whether
Normal or Inverse is selected].

L4 Troll Throttle Limit 00 00 to 20% of Troll Maximum (L3)

L5 Troll Pulse Duration 00 00.0 to 09.9 Seconds.

L6 Troll Pulse Percentage 25.0 00.0 to 100.0%

L7 Lock Up Percentage (Hurth Only) 45 (L106) 00.0 to 100.0%

60 (L107) Used only when L106 or L107 is selected.

Table 7: Troubleshooting Function Codes

Function Code Function Name Default Value Value Range or Options

H0 Diagnostic none Input Voltage (+/- 0.5VDC)
Tachometer Sensor Frequency
Lever A/D, Stations 1, 2, 3, & 4
Transfer Button, Stations 1, 2, 3, & 4
Software Revision Level
H1 Erase EPROM none Return to Factory Defaults
(For Authorized Personnel Only)
H2 Driver Fault Detection Enable 00 00 - None Enabled
Allows the Processor to monitor the clutch and/or
troll solenoids.

5-5 Field Service Test Unit (Break-out Box) and

Multimeter Use
Refer to Appendix A - MM13927 Manual for more information on the use of the Field Service Test Unit
(Break-out Box).

To aid in adjusting the following list of Processor signals, ZF Marine Electronics recommends the use of a
ZF Marine Electronics Field Service Test Unit (P/N 13927) (Break-out Box) and a calibrated Multimeter.

Table 8: Electric Throttle Functions requiring Field Service Test Unit and Multimeter

Code Function Name Code Function Name

E1 Throttle in Neutral E4 Throttle Maximum Astern
E2 Throttle Minimum E6 High Idle
E3 Throttle Maximum

Page 5-28
5 SET UP PROCEDURE

Table 9: Solenoid Trolling Functions requiring Field Service Test Unit and Multimeter

Code Function Name Code Function Name

L2 Trolling Minimum L4 Troll Throttle Limit
L3 Trolling Maximum

5-6 System Programming And Adjustments

NOTE:
SINGLE SCREW APPLICATIONS: The Function Values may be entered and stored in any order.
TWIN SCREW APPLICATIONS: The A1 Function must be set FIRST, and the A0 Function must be set SECOND.
The rest of the Function Values may be entered and stored in any order.
IF ZF HURTH GEARS ARE USED: Set L1 Function after the A1 and A0 Functions are set.

Once the above Functions are set, either cycle power to the Processors or wait five (5) minutes, before
continuing Set Up Procedures.

NOTE: Power must be turned ON to the Processors when programming or making any adjustments to the
System.

NOTE: In order to prevent nuisance alarms when first setting up a System, some Function Codes take up to 5
minutes to become ACTIVE. The Functions affected by this are the functions that rely on Serial Communication,
such as A0, A1, A2, A3, E7, and L0. Cycling power OFF, then ON, expedites these features making the
Functions available immediately.
5-6.1 Processor Functions

5-6.1.1 Function Code A1 – Number of Engines

The total number of engines must be entered into the memory of each of the Processors. All
Processors in an installation must have the SAME VALUE entered.
The available Values for this Function are:

01 Single Screw (Default Value)

02 Twin Screw
03 Triple Screw (if required, contact a ZF Marine Technician.)
04 Quad Screw (if required, contact a ZF Marine Technician.)

05 Quint Screw (if required, contact a ZF Marine Technician.)

NOTE: If Processors are not connected by a serial communication cable, leave the A1 function code at Default
Value.

NOTE: Twin screw or more applications require Function Code A1 Value to be changed on ALL Processors
prior to changing the Value of Function Code A0.

To change the Value (Refer to Sections 5-2 and 5-3, page 5-2):
A) Scroll to Function Code A1.
Figure 21: Display LED Function A1 B) Activate Set Up Mode.
C) Scroll Up or Down to the desired Value.
D) Store the Value to memory.
E) Repeat on all Processors before proceeding to the next Function.
Page 5-29
5 SET UP PROCEDURE

5-6.1.2 Function Code A0 – Processor Identification

NOTE: In twin screw or more applications, the Value of Function Code A0 can be changed only AFTER the
Value in Function Code A1 has been changed to 02 or higher on ALL Processors.

In applications where there is more than one screw, the system must know which Processor is
where. Every Processor must have its OWN UNIQUE identifying number. At NO time can
two or more Processors be identified by the same Processor Identification Number.
The available Values for this Function are:

00 (Default Value), 01, 02, 03, 04 and 05.

NOTE: If Processors are not connected by a serial communication cable, leave the A0 function code at
Default Value.

To change the Value (Refer to Sections 5-2 and 5-3, page 5-2):
A) Scroll to Function Code A0.
Figure 22: Display LED Function A0 B) Activate Set Up Mode.
C) Scroll Up or Down to the desired Value.
D) Store the Value to memory.

E) Repeat on all Processors before proceeding to the next Function.

NOTE: Before continuing set up, wait 5 minutes or cycle power.

NOTE: If ZF Hurth Gears are used, set the L1 parameter next.

5-6.1.3 Function Code A2 – One Lever Operation

In Twin Screw or more applications, the System has the ability to command all engines and
transmissions to the same speed and direction with a single Control Head lever. This
Function allows this Feature to be enabled or disabled. (Refer to Section 2 - OPERATION, for
operating instructions)

The available Values for this Function are:

00 Disabled

01 Enabled (Default Value)

To change the Value (Refer to Sections 5-2 and 5-3, page 5-2):

Figure 23: Display LED Function A2

A) Scroll to Function Code A2.

B) Activate Set Up Mode.
C) Scroll Up or Down to the desired Value.
D) Store the Value to memory.

Page 5-30
5 SET UP PROCEDURE

5-6.1.4 Function Code A3 – SE (Station Expander)

NOTE: This Manual does not go into detail on the Station Expander installation and adjustments. For further
information on the Station Expander, refer to Section 8 - CONTROL OPTIONS or contact your local ZF Marine
Electronics Representative.
The SE is a separate unit, which gives the System the ability to increase the number of
Remote Stations.
The available Values for this Function are:

00 Disabled (Default Value)

01 Enabled

Contact ZF Marine Electronics if this Function Code is going to be changed from the default
setting.

5-6.1.5 Function Code A4 – Neutral Indication Tone

This Function allows the installer to turn ON a 1/2 second, low frequency tone to indicate
Neutral.

The available Values for this Function are:

00 Disabled (Default Value)

01 Tone sounds when the Control Head’s lever reaches Neutral.

02 Tone sounds when the Processor commands the Transmission to Neutral.

To change the Value (Refer to Sections 5-2 and 5-3, page 5-2):
A) Scroll to Function Code A4.
Figure 24: Display LED Function A4 B) Activate Set Up Mode.
C) Scroll Up or Down to the desired Value.
D) Store the Value to memory.

5-6.2 Throttle Functions

The following Throttle Functions are set up in Section 6 - DOCK TRIALS:

Table 10: Throttle Functions Performed during Dock Trials

Code Function Name Code Function Name

E1 Throttle in Neutral E4 Throttle Maximum Astern
E2 Throttle Minimum E5 Throttle Pause Following Shift
E3 Throttle Maximum E6 High Idle

5-6.2.6 Function Code E0 – Electric Engine Throttle Profile

This Function, in combination with the Throttle Harness type, configures the throttle output
profile to meet the specifications of these various engines.

The available Values for this Function are listed below:

01 - Caterpillar (PWM) (8 to 92%)

02 - Cummins Centry (Voltage) (0.9 to 4.5 VDC)
03 - Cummins Quantum (Voltage) (0.9 to 1.2 - 4.0 VDC)
04 - Detroit Diesel (Voltage) (0.64 to 4.65 VDC)
05 - MTU or MAN (Current) (4.0 to 20.0 mA)
06 - Scania (Voltage (0.42 to 2.95 VDC)
07 - John Deere (Voltage) (0.5 to 4.5 VDC)
Page 5-31
5 SET UP PROCEDURE

08 - Volvo (Voltage) (0.6 to 3.6 VDC)

09 - Detroit Diesel (Frequency) (120.64 to 360.9 Hz)
10 - Detroit Diesel (Frequency) (120.64 to 463.5 Hz)
The Default Value is set to 06 Scania Profile.

To change the Value (Refer to Sections 5-2 and 5-3, page 5-2):

A) Scroll to Function Code E0.

Figure 25: Display LED Function E0 B) Activate Set Up Mode.
C) Scroll Up or Down until the desired Value is displayed.
D) Store the Value to memory.

5-6.2.7 Function Code E7 – Active Synchronization

This Function Code selects the type of Synchronization. The types are described in Section 2
- OPERATION .

The available Values for this Function are:

00 Disabled (DEFAULT)

01 Enabled
To change the Value (Refer to Sections 5-2 and 5-3, page 5-2):

A) Scroll to Function Code E7.

Figure 26: Display LED Function E7 B) Activate Set Up Mode.
C) Scroll Up or Down to the desired Value.
D) Store the Value to memory.

5-6.3 Clutch Functions

The following Clutch Functions are set up in Section 7 - SEA TRIALS:
Table 11: Basic Clutch Functions Performed during Sea Trials

Code Function Name Code Function Name

C2 Proportional (Reversal) Pause C3 Proportional (Reversal) Pause Time

5-6.3.1 Function Code C0 – Clutch Pressure Interlock

This adjustment is to be set to Enabled only if the optional Clutch
Pressure Switch is being used with this application.
This Function enables or disables the feature and allows for two different modes of behavior
when a Clutch Pressure Switch is used. Refer to Section 8 - CONTROL OPTIONS, for detailed
information.

The available Values for this Function are:

00 Not Installed (Default Value)

01 Installed

02 Throttle Clutch Pressure Interlock Mode

NOTE: The C002 value is recommended in Gear Boxes that take longer than 10 seconds to reach operating
pressure. Refer to Section 8 - CONTROL OPTIONS for more information on the settings.
To change the Value (Refer to Sections 5-2 and 5-3, page 5-2):

Page 5-32
5 SET UP PROCEDURE

A) Scroll to Function Code C0.

Figure 27: Display LED Function C0 B) Activate Set Up Mode.
C) Scroll Up or Down to the desired Value.
D) Store the Value to memory.

5-6.3.2 Function Code C1 – Clutch Interlock Delay

This adjustment is to be set to Enabled only if the optional Clutch
Pressure Switch is being used with this application.
This Function works together with Function Code C0 – Clutch Pressure Interlock. Refer to
Section 8 - CONTROL OPTIONS, for further information.

The available Values are 00.5 to 10.0 seconds. The Default Value is 01.0 seconds.

To change the Value (Refer to Sections 5-2 and 5-3, page 5-2):

A) Scroll to Function Code C1.

Figure 28: Display LED Function C1 B) Activate Set Up Mode.
C) Scroll Up or Down to the desired Value.
D) Store the Value to memory.

5-6.3.3 Function Code C4 – Proportional Pause Ratio

This Function Code selects whether the Proportional Pause Time is the same in Ahead and
Astern or whether the time in Ahead is twice that in Astern.

Standard vessels with a bow and a stern typically select a pause which is twice as much in
Ahead compared to Astern. This is because much more speed is obtainable in Ahead, then
Astern. Consequently, more time is required to slow down from Ahead as compared to
Astern.
NOTE: When the Controls are installed on a vessel such as a double ended Ferry or the Controls are being
used to control a thruster, the proportional pause should be the same in Ahead as Astern or Port and
Starboard in the case of a Thruster.

The available Values for this Function are:

00 2:1 Ahead to Astern vs. Astern to Ahead (Default Value)

01 1:1 Ahead to Astern vs. Astern to Ahead

00 - 2:1 Ratio

• This is the default setting. This function determines how the value set during Sea Trials for
C3 - Proportional Pause Time, is applied.
• The number of seconds selected is for an Ahead to Astern maneuver only. An Astern to
Ahead maneuver will be one-half of the C3 -Proportional Pause Time selected. This is the
typical selection since most vessels do not reach the same throttle in Astern as they would
in Ahead.

Therefore, the time required to get to a sufficient water speed for a safe reversal is
significantly less.

01- 1:1 Ratio

• When this setting is selected, the value set during Sea Trials for C3 - Proportional Pause
Time is the same for both Ahead to Astern, as with Astern to Ahead maneuvers.

Page 5-33
 5 SET UP PROCEDURE

• This may be selected when the vessel reaches the same water speed in both direc-
tions, as would be the case with a Double Ended Ferry. Another application where this
option may be selected would be the control of a Bow or Stern Thruster.

To change the Value (Refer to Sections 5-2 and 5-3, page 5-2):

A) Scroll to Function Code C4.

Figure 29: Display LED Function C4 B) Activate Set Up Mode.
C) Scroll Up or Down to the desired Value.
D) Store the Value to memory.

5-6.4 Troll Functions

The following Troll Function is set up during Dock Trials for ZF Hurth Transmissions only. Refer to
Section 6 - DOCK TRIALS:
Table 12: Troll Function Performed during Dock Trials

Code Function Name

L7 Lock Up Percentage (ZF Hurth Only)

The following Troll Functions are set up during Sea Trials. Refer to Section 7 - SEA TRIALS:
Table 13: Troll Functions Performed during Sea Trials

Code Function Name Code Function Name

L2 Troll Minimum Pressue L5 Troll Pulse Duration
L3 Troll Maximum Pressure L6 Troll Pulse Percentage
L4 Troll Throttle Limit

IMPORTANT: If ZF Hurth Gears are used, set the L1 parameter after A1 and A0.

5-6.4.4 Function Code L0 – Troll Enable and Control Head Lever Troll Range

There are three types which can be used to control any trolling valve. The available
Values are:

00 = No Trolling Valve (Normal Operating Mode) DEFAULT

01 = Type 1 20 degrees Troll Range

02 = Type 2 35 degrees Troll Range

03 = Type 3 45 degrees Troll Range

NOTE: When Troll Type 3 is selected, maximum throttle is limited to 75%

Figure 30: 20 Degree Troll Range - Type 1 Figure 31: 35 Degree Troll Range - Type 2 Figure 32: 45 Degree Troll Range - Type 3

To change the Value (Refer to Sections 5-2 and 5-3, page 5-2):
Page 5-34
5 SET UP PROCEDURE

Figure 33: Display LED Function L0 A) Scroll to Function Code L0.

B) Activate Set Up Mode.
C) Scroll Up or Down to the desired Value.
D) Store the Value to memory
5-6.4.5 L1 - Solenoid Troll Valve Function
CAUTION: This feature MUST be entered and set AFTER A0 - Processor Identification, if ZF Hurth
Gears are used. All other features may then be entered and set in any order.

Refer to Table 14: to select the correct set up for the trolling valve used with this application.

The manner in which the current signal to the Proportional Valve behaves is determined with
this function.
Table 14: Solenoid Trolling Valve Function L1 Type Selection

VALUE TROLL VALVE DESCRIPTION

00 Normal Reintjes (DEFAULT) When selected, the current to the Proportional Valve increases
ZF 550 and lower as Clutch pressure increases. When Lockup (Full Pressure) is selected, the
current drops to 0.
01 Inverse Twin Disc 6000 Series When selected, the current to the Proportional Valve increases as Clutch
ZF 600 and higher pressure increases. When Lockup (Full Pressure) is selected, the current
drops to 0.
02 Normal ZF 220 - 550 12 VDC When selected, the current to the Proportional Valve increases as Clutch
pressure increases. When Lockup (Full Pressure) is selected, the current
drops to 0. Preset for ZF 220 - 550 12 VDC Systems.
03 Normal ZF 220 - 550 24 VDC When selected, the current to the Proportional Valve increases as Clutch
pressure increases. When Lockup (Full Pressure) is selected, the current
drops to 0. Preset for ZF 220 - 550 24 VDC Systems.
04 Normal ZF 2000 24 VDC When selected, the current to the Proportional Valve decreases as Clutch
pressure increases. When Lockup (Full Pressure) is selected, the current
drops to 0. Preset for ZF 2000 24 VDC Series Systems.
05 Inverse ZF 600, 1900, 2500 24 When selected, the current to the Proportional Valve decreases as Clutch
VDC pressure increases. When Lockup (Full Pressure) is selected, the current
drops to 0. Preset for ZF 600, 1900, or 2500 24 VDC Series Systems.
06 ZF Hurth 12 VDC Preset for 12 VDC ZF Hurth Systems.
07 ZF Hurth 24 VDC Preset for 24 VDC ZF Hurth Systems.

To change the Value (Refer to Sections 5-2 and 5-3, page 5-2):

The default value is 00.

Figure 34: Display LED Function L1 A) Scroll to Function Code L1.
B) Activate Set Up Mode.
C) Scroll Up or Down to the appropriate Value for the Trolling Valve.
D) Store the Value to memory

5-6.5 Troubleshooting Functions

5-6.5.1 Function Code H0 - Diagnostics

This Function is used during troubleshooting and is explained in detail in Appendix B -

TROUBLESHOOTING DIAGNOSTIC MENU.

5-6.5.2 Function Code H1 – Return to Factory Defaults

This Function may be used during troubleshooting.

(Do not make any adjustments to this Function Code, unless directed to do so by ZF Marine
Electronics Service or Engineering Departments).
Page 5-35
5 SET UP PROCEDURE

5-6.5.3 Solenoid Troubleshooting Functions

5-6.5.3.1 Function Code H2 - Driver Fault Detection Enable

The H2 Function is available only on Processors with integrated Clutch and/or Troll
Solenoid command.

The Processor can be programmed to monitor the current flow through the Clutch
and/or Troll solenoid. When this option is selected, if the current level is too high or
too low, an alarm is sounded and an Error Code is produced.

Table 15: lists the required value that needs to be entered for Function Code H2, to
monitor the Ahead, Astern, Neutral clutch solenoids and the Troll Command and
On/Off.
Table 15: Solenoid Error Status Enable

Value Ahead Astern Neutral (optional) Troll Command Troll On/off

00 off off off off off
01 ON off off off off
02 off ON off off off
03 ON ON off off off
04 off off ON off off
05 ON off ON off off
06 off ON ON off off
07 ON ON ON off off
08 off off off ON off
09 ON off off ON off
10 off ON off ON off
11 ON ON off ON off
12 off off ON ON off
13 ON off ON ON off
14 off ON ON ON off
15 ON ON ON ON off
16 off off off off ON
17 ON off off off ON
18 off ON off off ON
19 ON ON off off ON
20 off off ON off ON
21 ON off ON off ON
22 off ON ON off ON
23 ON ON ON off ON
24 off off off ON ON
25 ON off off ON ON
26 off ON off ON ON
27 ON ON off ON ON
28 off off ON ON ON
29 ON off ON ON ON
30 off ON ON ON ON
31 ON ON ON ON ON

Page 5-36
5 SET UP PROCEDURE

NOTE: Function Codes 32 through 63 are reserved for future expansion and should not be used at this time.

Page 5-37
6 DOCK TRIALS

6 DOCK TRIALS
WARNING: It is imperative that the information provided in the previous Sections have been READ and
FOLLOWED precisely, PRIOR to attempting a Dock Trial.

NOTE: On multiple screw applications, the following tests must be performed on all Processors. If any of the
following tests fail, consult Appendix B Troubleshooting.

6-1 Control Heads (Engines Stopped)

A) Turn power ON to the Control System.
B) The Control Head at each Remote Station should produce an intermittent tone.
C) Take command at a Remote Station.
D) Perform each of the following steps on all Remote Stations.
1 Move the Control Head’s lever(s) full Ahead and full Astern. Ensure that there are no
obstructions to the movement, the Processor reacts to the lever movement, and that no tones
are generated.
2 Place the Control Head’s lever(s) in the Neutral position.
3 Depress and hold the Station transfer button while moving the Control Head’s lever(s) to the
Ahead detent. Release the transfer button.
• The red LED on the Control Head should blink, indicating Warm-up Mode has been
entered. Warm-up Mode only operates in the Ahead direction.
If the red indicator light BLINKS, continue with the testing. If the red indicator light DOES NOT BLINK,
check connections as stated in the appropriate Appendix A - Control Head Service Sheet.

6-2 Start Interlock (Engines Stopped)

A) Turn the Processor DC power OFF.
• Verify that the engine(s) will not start.
B) Turn Processor DC power ON. Do not take command at a Remote Station.
• Verify that the engine(s) will not start.
C) Take command at a Remote Station. Place the Control Head’s lever(s) to approximately 50% of the
throttle range.
• Verify that the engine(s) will not start.
D) Place the Control Head’s lever(s) in the Neutral/Idle position. Take command at a Remote Station.
• Verify that the engine(s) will start in this position.
If any of the above tests fail, verify Start Interlock installation and connections. Refer to Section 4 -
INSTALLATION.

6-3 Throttle Dock Settings (Engines Stopped)

6-3.1 E2 - Throttle Minimum and E3 - Throttle Maximum Signal

ADJUSTMENTS MAY NOT BE REQUIRED.

Page 6-38
6 DOCK TRIALS

Verify the existing Throttle Minimum and Maximum values, prior to adjusting them.

NOTE: Synchronization is dependent on the Throttle Minimum and Maximum adjustments being equal on each
Processor.

NOTE: Prior to adjustments, the correct Engine Signal Selection should have been made during Section 5 -
SET UP PROCEDURES.

Throttle Minimum (E2)

This function allows the installer the ability to adjust the Processor’s Throttle signal at Idle,
above and beyond the profile set in E0 Engine Throttle Profile. This value is adjustable
anywhere between 1% to 97% of the maximum throttle output capability of the driver. The
value must be at least 3% less than E3 Throttle Maximum setting.

Throttle Maximum (E3)

This function allows the installer the ability to adjust the Processor’s Throttle signal at full
throttle, above and beyond the profile set in E0 Engine Throttle Profile. This value is
adjustable anywhere between 4% to 100% of the maximum throttle output capability of the
driver. The value must be at least 3% greater than the E2 Throttle Minimum setting.

6-3.1.1 Processor Throttle Signal Check

Use the Service Field Test Unit and a Multimeter:

A) Disconnect the Throttle Wire Harness from the Processor.
B) Connect the 8-Pin connector of the Service Field Test Unit to the Processor
Throttle connector and to the Throttle Wire Harness. Refer to Appendix B -
MM13927 Service Field Test Unit manual.
C) Depending on the type of signal required, follow the appropriate column of
Table 16:
Table 16: Throttle Output Adjustments

PWM (Duty Cycle) VOLTAGE (VDC) Current (mA) Frequency (Hz)

1. Set Multimeter to Duty 1. Set Multimeter to 1. Set the Multimeter up 1. Set Multimeter to
Cycle Setting. Voltage Setting as an Amp Meter Frequency setting.

% VDC mA Hz
2. On the Multimeter 2. On the Multimeter 2. On the Multimeter 2. On the Multimeter
attach the black Lead to attach the black Lead to attach the black Lead to attach the black Lead to
COM and the red Lead COM and the red Lead COM and the red Lead COM and the red Lead
to V. to V. to mA. to V.
3. Attach the Multimeter 3. Attach the Multimeter 3. Attach the Multimeter 3. Attach the Multimeter
black Lead to the black Lead to the black Lead to the black Lead to the
negative (-) and the red negative (-) and the red negative (-) and the red negative (-) and the red
LED to the PWM. LED to the VDC. LED to the mA LED to the Frequency.

D) Turn ON power to the Engine’s ECM. Ensure power is ON to the Processor.

E) Scroll to Function Code to be checked (E2 or E3). The Multimeter will read
the output signal for Throttle Minimum (E2) or Throttle Maximum (E3).

NOTE: To read Current, the mA Push Button on the Service Field Test Unit MUST be depressed.

NOTE: Synchronization is dependent on the Throttle Minimum and Maximum adjustments being equal on each
Processor.

Page 6-39
6 DOCK TRIALS

6-3.1.2 Throttle Adjustment

If E2 Throttle Minimum or E3 Throttle Maximum require adjustment, perform the following

on the appropriate Processor.
To change the Value (Refer to Sections 5-2 and 5-3, page 5-2):

NOTE: When in Set Up Mode to show values that have more than two digits (EXAMPLE: 010.5) DEPRESS
AND HOLD the RIGHT ARROW. The Function Code will disappear and be replaced with the three or four digit
Value. The Decimal Indicator will light if the number has a decimal value. Releasing the RIGHT ARROW
returns the Display to the Normal blinking Function Code and two digit value.
Figure 35: Display LED Function E2
A) Leave the Service Field Test Unit connected to the Processor.
B) Activate Set Up Mode.
C) Scroll either Up or Down to change the value of the parameter to be changed.
(E2 Throttle Minimum, E3 Throttle Maximum
Figure 36: Display LED Function E3 D) Store the Value to memory.
E) Remove the Service Field Test Unit and reconnect the Throttle Wire Harness
to the Processor.

6-4 E4 - Throttle Maximum Astern(Engines

Stopped)
This value determines the percentage of Throttle Maximum that is allowed in Astern. This is adjustable
anywhere between 1% to 100%.
The values of this Function are 1.0% to 100.0%. Throttle defaults are based on Throttle Profile selected.

A) Disconnect the Throttle Wire Harness from the CruiseCommand Processor.

B) Connect the 8-Pin connector of the Service Field Test Unit to the Processor THROTTLE
connector and to the Throttle Wire Harness. Refer to Appendix B - MM13927 Service Field
Test Unit manual.
C) Turn ON power to the Engine’s ECM. Ensure Power is ON to the Processor.
D) Scroll to Function Code E4.
• The Multimeter will read the output signal for Throttle Maximum Astern.

NOTE: To read current, the mA Push Button on the Service Field Test Unit must be depressed.

Figure 37: Display LED Function E4 E) Activate Set Up Mode.

F) Scroll Up or Down to the desired Value.
G) Store the Value to memory.

H) Remove the Service Field Test Unit and reconnect the Throttle Wire Harness to the Processor.

6-5 Engine Stop Switches (Engines Running)

Start the engine(s) and verify that the Stop switches (normally push buttons) function correctly at all
Remote Stations. Refer to the information supplied by the engine manufacturer or switch supplier for set
up and adjustments.

CAUTION: An Engine Stop Switch at each station is an absolute requirement. Refer to CFR46, 62.35-5 and
ABYC P-24.5.8.

Page 6-40
6 DOCK TRIALS

WARNING: Do not attempt to continue tests until all Engine Stop Switches are functioning correctly!

6-6 Control Head Command Checks (Engines

Running)
A) Start the engine(s) and let them run at Neutral/Idle.
B) Place one Control Head lever at a time into the Ahead detent, the Astern detent and then Neutral.
• SOLENOID SHIFT: Confirm that the movement of the vessel is in the correct direction. If
incorrect, reverse the electric cable connections at the shift solenoids.
C) Place the Control System into Warm-Up Mode and confirm that there is control of speed.
D) Run the throttle up to approximately 20% of the throttle range for at least 10 seconds.
E) Return the lever to the Neutral/Idle position.
F) Repeat steps A) thru E) at the remaining Control Head levers.

6-7 E1 - Throttle in Neutral (Cummins-Quantum

Engines Only) (Engines Running)
NOTE: This Function is used ONLY when the E0 Select Engine Throttle Profile is set for 03 - Cummins
Quantum.

The Cummins-Quantum Engine requires different throttle command signals in Neutral than when In-
Gear. These engines require a voltage throttle signal of 0.9 VDC when unloaded at Neutral. When a load
is placed upon the engine by engaging the clutch, the throttle command signal increases to 1.2 VDC.

The Throttle in Neutral Function allows the installer the ability to adjust the throttle signal level at
Neutral/Idle and also adjust a second throttle signal level for when the clutch is engaged. The Neutral
value may be adjusted anywhere between 1 to 20% of the maximum throttle output capability of the
voltage circuit. For example; if the circuit has the ability to drive 0 to 5.00 VDC and the value entered is
10, the output at Neutral would be 0.50 VDC.

The values of this Function are 01.0% to 50.0%. Throttle defaults are based on the Throttle Profile
selected.
A) Disconnect the Throttle Wire Harness from the Processor.
B) Connect the 8-Pin connector of the Service Field Test Unit to the Processor THROTTLE
connector and to the Throttle Wire Harness. Refer to Appendix B -MM13927 Service Field
Test Unit manual.
C) Turn ON power to the Engine’s ECM. Ensure Power is ON to the Processor.
D) Scroll to Function Code E1.
Figure 38: Display LED Function E) Activate Set Up Mode.
E1
F) Scroll Up or Down to the desired Value.
G) Store the Value to memory.

H) Remove the Service Field Test Unit and reconnect the Throttle Wire Harness to the Processor

Page 6-41
6 DOCK TRIALS

6-8 E5 - Throttle Pause Following Shift

(Engines Running)
NOTE: A Test Control Head and a stop-watch are recommended to determine the correct setting for the
Throttle Pause. If a Test Control Head is not available, a second person may be needed.
A) Move the Station in command’s lever to the Ahead detent, while monitoring the Shaft.
• ELECTRIC THROTTLE: Start the stop-watch while monitoring the Shaft.
B) When the Shaft begins to rotate, stop the stop-watch.
C) Record the time expired on the stop-watch..
NOTE: If the time recorded in step C) exceeds 5.0 seconds, a Clutch Pressure Interlock is required. Refer to
Section 8 - CONTROL OPTIONS.

To change the Value (Refer to Sections 5-2 and 5-3, page 5-2):

A) Scroll to Function Code E5.

Figure 39: Display LED Function E5 B) Activate Set Up Mode.
C) Scroll Up or Down to the desired Value.
D) Store the Value to memory.

6-9 E6 - High Idle (Engines Running)

This function allows the operator the option of having a second elevated Idle speed. This second elevated
Idle can be adjusted from 0 to 20% of full throttle. If 0 is selected, High Idle will be the same as normal or
Low Idle, which is the default value.

When power is first applied to the system, the commanded throttle is low. In order to increase the RPM to
the High Idle command, the Transfer Button must be depressed for 1/2 second then released. This can be
done with the Control Head lever in either the Ahead, Neutral, or Astern Detent.

The values of this Function are 0% to 20% of Throttle Maximum. Default Value is set to 00.

A) Disconnect the Throttle Wire Harness from the Processor.

B) Connect the 8-Pin connector of the Service Field Test Unit to the Processor Throttle connector
and to the Throttle Wire Harness. Refer to Appendix B - MM13927 Service Field Test Unit
manual.
C) Turn ON power to the Engine’s ECM. Ensure Power is ON to the Processor.
D) Scroll to Function Code E6.
• The Multimeter will read the output signal for Idle.

NOTE: To read current, the mA Push Button on the Service Field Test Unit must be depressed.

Figure 40: Display LED Function E6 E) Activate Set Up Mode.

F) Scroll Up or Down to the desired Value.
G) Store the Value to memory.

H) Remove the Service Field Test Unit and reconnect the Throttle Wire Harness to the Processor.

Page 6-42
6 DOCK TRIALS

6-10 L7 - Lock Up Percentage (Hurth

Transmissions Only) (Engines Running)
This function controls the amount of current while the gear is locked up and troll is turned OFF. Refer to
the Gear Manual for maximum current setting

Factory calculated preset values are set if L106 or L107 are used.
Function Range: 0.0 - 100.0%

Preset Values: L106 (12 VDC) 45.0

L107 (24 VDC) 60.0

If the preset values need to be altered, a multimeter must be set to measure the current. Refer to
Appendix B - MM13927 Service Field Test Unit manual on set up.

To change the Value (Refer to Sections 5-2 and 5-3, page 5-2):

Figure 41: Display LED Function L7 A) Scroll to Function Code L7.

B) Activate Set Up Mode.
C) Scroll Up or Down to the desired Value.
D) Store the Value to memory
E) Remove the Service Field Test Unit and multimeter, replacing any unplugged
wire harnesses.

Page 6-43
7 SEA TRIALS

7 SEA TRIALS
WARNING: It is imperative that the information provided in the previous Sections has been read and followed
precisely, prior to attempting a Sea Trial. If any of the following tests fail, discontinue the Sea Trial
immediately and return to the dock. Consult Appendix B Troubleshooting Section or a ZF Facility prior to
resuming the Sea Trial.

NOTE: In Multi Screw Applications, the following tests must be performed on all engines/transmissions.
During the course of the Dock Trial and Sea Trials, fill out the Trial Report at the end of Section 7. Retain this
information for future use.

7-1 Full Speed Setting

A) Warm-up the engine(s) and transmission(s) and slowly move into open water.
B) Gradually move the Control Head lever(s) to Full speed.
C) If synchronization is installed, disable synchronization as explained in Section 2 - OPERATION.
• ELECTRIC THROTTLE: If the engine RPM is low, refer to Appendix B - Service Field Test Unit
on how to check electric setting.
• If the engine RPM is high, decrease by using Function Code E3 - Throttle Maximum, as
explained in Section 6 - DOCK TRIALS.
D) For multi screw applications, check that matching Idle, Mid-range and Full speed Control Head lever
positions cause equal RPM in both engines.
• ELECTRIC THROTTLE: If RPM’s do not match, adjust Function Code E3 - Throttle Maximum,
refer to Section 6 - DOCK TRIALS.

7-2 C2 - Proportional (Reversal) Pause

The proportional pause feature provides engine deceleration when making a direction change. The pause
is variable and in proportion to:

• The Control Head’s lever position prior to the reversal.

• How long the Control Head’s lever has been in that position prior to the reversal.
The C4 - Proportional (Reversal) Pause Ratio for the C2 Function is stored during Set Up. Refer to Section
5 - SET UP PROCEDURES.

The sequence of events, are as follows for the different Reversal Pause types:

7-2.1 In-Gear Delay [C200]

1 The Throttle position drops to Idle.
2 The Transmission remains engaged in Ahead or Astern.
3 The Control System pauses at this position until the delay has timed out.
4 The Transmission shifts to the opposite gear (Astern or Ahead).
5 The Throttle position moves to the Control Head’s present lever position.

7-2.2 Neutral Delay [C201]

1 The Throttle position drops to Idle.
2 The Tranmission shifts to Neutral.
3 The Control System pauses at this position until the delay has timed out.
4 The Transmission shifts to the opposite gear (Astern or Ahead).
5 The Throttle position moves to the Control Head’s present lever position.

Page 7-44
 7 SEA TRIALS

7-2.3 Store C2 - Proportional Pause Value

To change the Value (Refer to Sections 5-2 and 5-3, page 5-2):

A) Scroll to Function Code C2.

Figure 42: Display LED Function C2 B) Activate Set Up Mode.
C) Scroll Up or Down to the desired Value.
D) Store the Value to memory.

7-3 C3 - Proportional (Reversal) Pause Time

NOTE: The pause on a through Neutral shift is proportional to the speed commanded and the time at that
speed. The Values listed for Function Code C3 - Proportional (Reversal) Pause Time, are the maximum possible
delays. When shifting from Idle Ahead to Idle Astern or vice-versa the delay is zero. The time required to build
up to the maximum pause is six times the Value selected. In addition, in order to build up to the maximum delay
Value, the System must be commanding Full Throttle. The Pause when shifting from Astern to Ahead is either
half or the same as the Ahead to Astern delay depending on the Value selected for Function Code C4 -
Proportional (Reversal) Pause Ratio.
7-3.1 Determine C3 Pause Requirement

NOTE: A stop-watch is required to accurately program the Proportional (Reversal) Pause Time.

The amount of pause required is determined as follows:

A) Place the Control Head lever(s) to the Full Ahead position.

B) Leave the Control Head lever(s) at this position for whichever of the following two is
longer:
• Sixty seconds.
• The vessel’s speed through the water reaches maximum.
C) Quickly move the Control Head lever(s) to Ahead Idle or Neutral, (depending on
Function Code C4 setting) while starting the stop-watch.
D) When the engine(s) RPM reaches Idle and the vessel’s speed through the water is within
two knots of the standard Idle Ahead speed, stop the stop-watch.
E) Program Function Code C3 to the time expired on the stop-watch.

7-3.2 Program Function Code C3

The available Values are 00 to 99 seconds. The default Value is 03 seconds.

To change the Value (Refer to Sections 5-2 and 5-3, page 5-2):

A) Scroll to Function Code C3.

Figure 43: Display LED Function C3 B) Activate Set Up Mode.
C) Scroll Up or Down to the desired Value.
D) Store the Value to memory.

7-3.3 Testing Proportional (Reversal) Pause Time

CAUTION: It is critical that the Proportional (Reversal) Pause is tested as outlined below, to ensure that is is
properly programmed. Failure to do so could cause damage to the transmission.

A) Position the boat in open water and slowly increase the Throttle to 25% of the speed
range.

Page 7-45
7 SEA TRIALS

B) Leave the Control Head lever(s) at this position for at least 60 seconds.
C) Quickly move the Control Head lever(s) to Idle Astern.
• The engine(s) RPM should drop to Idle.
• The Clutch should stay engaged or shift to Neutral for 25% of the time selected
with Function Code C3 Proportional Pause Time.
• Once the time has expired, the Clutch should Shift to Astern.
• The engine RPM will drop slightly when the Astern load is placed on the engine,
but not to the point where it comes close to stalling.
D) Increase the Throttle slightly until the vessel starts moving in the opposite direction.
• If the engine stalled or came very close to stalling, increase the Value of Function
Code C3 by following the steps in the previous Section. Repeat steps A) through
C).
• If the engine does not stall or come close to stalling, proceed with the next step.
E) Repeat steps A) through D) with the Throttle at 50%, 75%, and 100% of the speed range.
• If the engine stalls at any time, increase the Value of Function Code C3 by one (1)
second and repeat the steps A) through D) again.
F) Once a Full Speed Reversal is successful without coming close to stalling, the
Proportional Pause is properly adjusted.

7-4 Synchronization Test

7-4.1 Equal Throttle Synchronization
A) Move both Control Head levers side by side to approximately 25% of the Throttle range.
B) If previously disabled, enable the synchronization by depressing the transfer button for two
seconds.
• The green LED on the Control Head should illuminate, indicating synchronization.
C) Check the engine tachometers to see if they are within 1% of one another.
D) Move both Control Head levers side by side to approximately 50% of the Throttle range.
E) Check the engine tachometers to see if they are within 1% of one another.
F) Move both Control Head levers side by side to approximately 75% of the Throttle range.
G) Check the engine tachometers to see if they are within 1% of one another.
H) Move both Control Head levers side by side to 100% of the Throttle range.
I) Check the engine tachometers to see if they are within 1% of one another.
• While synchronized, if the tachometers have a greater than 1% difference at any engine
RPM, Active Synchronization is recommended.

7-4.2 Active Synchronization

A) Move both Control Head levers side by side to approximately 25% of the Throttle range.
B) If previously disabled, enable the synchronization by depressing the transfer button for two
seconds.
• The green LED on the Control Head may blink while driving toward synchronization.
• Once the engine RPM’s are within 1% of one another, the green LED will remain solidly lit.
C) Check the engine tachometers to see if they are within 1% of one another.
D) Move both Control Head levers side by side to approximately 50% of the Throttle range.
E) Check the engine tachometers to see if they are within 1% of one another.
F) Move both Control Head levers side by side to approximately 75% of the Throttle range.
Page 7-46
7 SEA TRIALS

G) Check the engine tachometers to see if they are within 1% of one another.
H) Move both Control Head levers side by side to 100% of the Throttle range.
I) Check the engine tachometers to see if they are within 1% of one another.

While synchronized, if the tachometers have a greater than 1% percent difference at any engine
RPM, or if they appear to be continually “hunting” for the correct RPM, refer to the Appendix B
Troubleshooting Section.

7-5 L2 - Trolling Minimum and L3 - Trolling

Maximum Adjustments
Troll Minimum Pressure (L2)

The amount of current delivered to the Proportional Valve when Minimum Pressure is desired, is
set with this function. This is adjustable anywhere between 01.0% to 99.0% of the total current
output capability of the circuit. The value set must be at least 1% less or more (depending on
whether non-inverted or inverted is selected) than Troll Maximum. The Default Value is 10.0%.

Troll Maximum Pressure (L3)

The amount of current delivered to the Proportional Valve when Maximum Pressure is desired, is
set with this function. This is adjustable anywhere between 02.0% to 100.0% of the total current
output capability of the circuit. The value set must be at least 1% more or less (depending on
whether non-inverted or inverted is selected) than Troll Minimum. The Default Value is 25.0%.

When the transmission has reached operating temperature, measure and record in Table 16: the Propeller
Shaft RPM at Idle Ahead.
Table 16: Record Propeller Shaft RPM at Idle Ahead

Propeller Shaft RPM

(when engines have reached operating temperature)

Use the Field Service Test Unit and a Multimeter: (Reference Appendix B - MM13927 Service Field Test
Unit manual for set up.)
A) Disconnect the Clutch/Troll Wire Harness from the Processor.
B) Connect the 12-Pin connector of the Service Field Test Unit to the Processor Clutch connector
and to the Clutch/Troll Wire Harness.
C) Set Multimeter to Current (mA) setting.
D) On the Multimeter, attach the Black Lead to COM and the Red Lead to mA.
E) Turn ON power to the Clutch Power Supply. Ensure Power is ON to the Processor.
F) Position the Control Head lever to the Ahead Detent and turn Troll Mode ON.
G) Activate the Function Menu.

7-5.1 L2 - Troll Minimum Set Up

Figure 44: Display LED Function L2
A) Scroll to the Function Code.
• The Multimeter will read the output signal for Troll Minimum when the Troll
Command Switch on the Test Unit is flipped away from "Troll Command".

B) Activate Set Up Mode.

Page 7-47
7 SEA TRIALS

C) Scroll Up or Down to the appropriate Value.

NOTE: When the trolling valve is in the minimum oil pressure position, Propeller Shaft RPM should be 30% of
the engaged RPM noted in Table 16:.

D) Record Propeller Shaft RPM on Table 17:

Table 17: Record L2 - Minimum Trolling Pressure

SINGLE SCREW
Propeller Shaft RPM at minimum Trolling Pressure (Approx. 30 - 50% of Table 16:)

Shaft RPM Current (mA) Function %

TWIN SCREW
Propeller Shaft RPM at minimum Trolling Pressure (Approx. 30 - 50% of Table 16:)

Shaft RPM Current (mA) Function %

PORT

STARBOARD

E) Store the Value to memory

7-5.1.1 L3 - Troll Maximum Set Up

A) Position the Control Head lever through the selected Troll Lever Range to the
Troll Maximum position.
Figure 45: Display LED Function L2
B) Scroll to the Function Code.
• The Multimeter will read the output signal for Troll Maximum when the Troll
Command Switch on the Test Unit is flipped away from "Troll Command".
NOTE: It is difficult to use a slipping clutch to control shaft RPM between 70% and 100% of normal shaft RPM.
However, it may be desirable to set the Maximum Trolling Pressure position higher than the 70% RPM, so that
added oil pressure is available when maneuvering.

C) Activate Set Up Mode.

D) Scroll Up or Down to the appropriate Value.
E) Record Propeller Shaft RPM on Table 18:
Table 18: Record L3-Maximum Trolling Pressure

SINGLE SCREW
Propeller Shaft RPM at maximum Trolling Pressure (Approx. 70% of Table 16:)

Shaft RPM Current (mA) Function %

TWIN SCREW
Propeller Shaft RPM at maximum Trolling Pressure (Approx. 70% of Table 16:)

Shaft RPM Current (mA) Function %

PORT

STARBOARD

F) Store the Value to memory

G) Position the Control Head lever into the Neutral/Idle position.
H) Remove the Service Field Test Unit and reconnect the Clutch/Troll Wire
Harness to the Processor.
Page 7-48
7 SEA TRIALS

7-6 L4 - Troll Throttle Limit

CAUTION: Consult the Trolling Valve’s Installation Manual prior to programming any increased throttle
above Idle, while slipping the Clutch. Failure to adhere to the Transmission manufactures directives
may permanently damage the Clutch Pack and void the warranty.

• The Value programmed for Function Code L4 is a percentage of the throttle range. The Throttle
Range is the difference between Throttle Maximum (E3) and Throttle Minimum (E2).
• The maximum percentage of the Throttle Range which the Value can be set to is 20% of Full
Throttle.
• The adjustment of this Function Code is a matter of personal preference. There is no set
procedure which determines when increased throttle should be used and what percentage of
the range it should be set to, but never exceed transmission manufacturers recommendation.
• The values of this Function are 00% to 20% of Throttle Maximum. Default Value is set to 00.
A) Disconnect the Throttle Wire Harness from the Processor.
B) Connect the 8-Pin connector of the Service Field Test Unit to the
Processor Throttle connector and to the Throttle Wire Harness.
Refer to Appendix B - MM13927 Service Field Test Unit manual for
set up.)
C) Turn ON power to the Engine’s ECM. Ensure Power is ON to the
Processor.
Figure 46: Display LED Function L4
D) Activate the Function Menu.
E) Scroll to the Function Code.
• The Multimeter will read the Troll Throttle Limit output signal.

NOTE: To read current, the mA Push Button on the Service Field Test Unit must be depressed.

F) Activate Set Up Mode.

G) Change the Value of the Function.
H) When the value required is displayed, store the value.
I) Remove the Service Field Test Unit and reconnect the Throttle Wire
Harness to the Processor.

7-7 L5 - Troll Pulse Duration

This function sets the time in seconds that the Proportional Valve will command L6 - Troll Pulse
Percentage. This function gives a pressure boost to the Clutch plate in order to get the Propeller Shaft
rotating prior to dropping to the level programmed in L2 - Troll Minimum.

The values of this Function are 0.0 to 9.9 Seconds. Default Value is set at 0.6 seconds.

To change the Value (Refer to Sections 5-2 and 5-3, page 5-2):
Figure 47: Display LED Function L5 A) Activate the Function Menu.
B) Scroll to the Function Code.
C) Activate Set Up Mode.

D) Change the Value of the Function.

E) When the value required is displayed, store the value.

Page 7-49
7 SEA TRIALS

7-8 L6 - Troll Pulse Percentage

This function sets the percentage of L3 - Troll Maximum that the Proportional Valve will be commanded
when first entering Troll Mode. This function determines the amount of pressure boost to the Clutch
plate in order to get the Propeller Shaft rotating prior to dropping to the level programmed in L2 - Troll
Minimum.

The values of this Function are 0.0% to 100.0%. Default Value is set at 25%.

To change the Value (Refer to Sections 5-2 and 5-3, page 5-2):
Figure 48: Display LED Function L6 A) Activate the Function Menu.
B) Scroll to the Function Code.
C) Activate Set Up Mode.

D) Change the Value of the Function.

E) When the value required is displayed, store the value.

7-9 Sea Trial Report

The purpose of this Sea Trial Report is to provide a convenient checklist and record of installation, dock
trial set up, and sea trial performance of the ZF Marine Electronics Propulsion Control System. Please
enter ALL of the information. We recommend that this form remains aboard the vessel, and a copy is sent
to ZF Marine Electronics along with the Warranty Registration which is located at the end of this manual.
Table 19: Vessel Information

Vessel Name: Hull # Trial Date:

Vessel Type: Dwg No.:

Installing Yard/Project Tel:

Manager:

Owner/Owner’s Tel:
Representative:

ENGINE DATA: MAKE: MODEL: HP(KW):

RPM:

PROPELLER DATA: No. of Screws: Propeller Type: Fixed

Other

GEAR DATA: MAKE: MODEL: RATIO:

NO. OF REMOTE STATIONS: Locations:

7-9.1 Control System Checks

Make the following checks prior to applying power to the Processor.

Table 20: Processor

PORT STARBOARD
Processor Serial Number:
Is the Processor subject to excessive heat? (Above 70 degrees C) YES NO YES NO
At least 4 feet (1,2m) from strong magnetic fields? YES NO YES NO
Accessible for checkout, adjustments, and maintenance? YES NO YES NO
Page 7-50
7 SEA TRIALS

Table 20: Processor

PORT STARBOARD
Processor Serial Number:
Are the Processors grounded? YES NO YES NO
Are all Electric Cables supported every 18 inches (45,72cm) YES NO YES NO
Are the electrical cable connections tight at the Processors and Control Heads? YES NO YES NO
Is the Processor’s Start Interlock Circuit being used? If NO, what type of start interlock is YES NO YES NO
being utilized?
Is there an Engine Stop Switch installed at each Remote Station YES NO YES NO
Are the Clutch cables protected by 10 Ampere Circuit Breakers? YES NO YES NO

Does Shift operate in the correct direction? YES NO YES NO

Does Throttle operate in the correct direction? YES NO YES NO

Table 21: Harness/Cable Lengths

PORT: STARBOARD:
Processor Serial Number:

Length in Feet Length in Feet

Control Head (circle one) Harness Cable Sta #_____
(circle one) Harness Cable Sta #_____
(circle one) Harness Cable Sta #_____
(circle one) Harness Cable Sta #_____
(circle one) Harness Cable Sta #_____
Ahead Solenoid Power Harness
Astern Solenoid Power Harness
If used, Neutral Solenoid Power Harness
Clutch Power Harness
If used, Clutch Pressure Switch Harness
If used, External Alarm Circuit Harness
Throttle Harness
If used, Troll ON/OFF Harness
If used, Troll Proportional Solenoid Harness
If used, Serial Communication Harness
If used, Tachometer Sensor Harness

Table 22: Power Supply

PORT STARBOARD
Processor Serial Number:
What is the source of Processor power and how is it charged?

Is there a backup power supply? YES NO YES NO

APS or other, explain

Are the power cables protected by 10 Ampere Circuit Breakers? YES NO YES NO
If separate power supplies are used for each Processor, do they have a common YES NO YES NO
ground?
What is the Voltage when not being charged? Battery________ Battery________
VDC VDC

Processor Processor
__________ VDC __________ VDC

Page 7-51
7 SEA TRIALS

Table 22: Power Supply

PORT STARBOARD
Processor Serial Number:
What is the Voltage when connected to Shore Power? Battery________ Battery________
VDC VDC

Processor Processor
__________ VDC __________ VDC
What is the Voltage when the engines are running? Battery________ Battery________
VDC VDC

Processor Processor
__________ VDC __________ VDC

Table 23: Dock Trials

PORT: STARBOARD:
Processor Serial Number:
Does the engine start when the Control System is turned OFF? YES NO YES NO
Does the Engine Stop Switch function at all Stations, regardless of RPM? YES NO YES NO
Can all Remote Stations take command? YES NO YES NO
Does the Warm-up Indicator Light blink in Ahead? YES NO YES NO
What is the Low Idle RPM? RPM RPM
High Idle RPM (optional) RPM RPM
Does the vessel surge forward with Control Head lever in the Ahead Detent? YES NO YES NO

Table 24: Record at Dock (Requires use of Field Service Test Unit)

PORT: STARBOARD:
Processor Serial Number:
Throttle in Neutral (Cummins Quantum only) VDC, mA, Hz, or %
Throttle Minimum VDC, mA, Hz, or %
Throttle Maximum VDC, mA, Hz, or %
Troll Minimum (signal) mA
Troll Maximum (signal) mA

Table 25: Sea Trials

PORT: STARBOARD:

Processor Serial Number:

Do the Dual Control Head levers match position and RPM throughout the speed YES NO YES NO
range?
The Full Speed Reversal Delay is set for how many seconds? SECONDS SECONDS

Is Synchronization operational? YES NO YES NO

Table 26: Record during Sea Trials (Requires use of Field Service Test Unit)

PORT: STARBOARD:
Processor Serial Number:
Engine Idle RPM RPM
Shaft Idle RPM (Calculate the Shaft Idle RPM as follows: Engine RPM
Idle RPM/Gear Ratio)
Full Throttle RPM RPM
Troll Minimum (Shaft RPM) (The desired Troll Minimum can be RPM (Actual)
calculated as follows: Shaft Idle RPM x 0.3)
Troll Maximum (Shaft RPM) (The desired Troll Maximum can be RPM (Actual)
calculated as follows: Shaft Idle RPM x 0.7)
Page 7-52
7 SEA TRIALS

7-9.2 Record Parameters

Record information onto the following Tables only after ALL information has been recorded in the
previous Section Control Checks.

Table 27: Record Processor Functions

CODE: FUNCTION NAME: PORT: STBD:

A0 Processor Identification
A1 Number of Engines
A2 One Lever Operation
A3 Station Expander (SE) Leave At Default. If Used, Contact A ZF Marine Electronics Representative
A4 Neutral Indication Tone

Table 28: Record Throttle Functions

CODE: FUNCTION NAME: PORT: STBD:

E0 Engine Throttle Profile
E1 Throttle in Neutral (only
available with Type 3
Throttle Profile)
E2 Throttle Minimum
E3 Throttle Maximum
E4 Throttle Maximum Astern
E5 Throttle Pause Following
Shift
E6 High Idle
E7 Active Synchronization

Table 29: Record Clutch Functions

CODE: FUNCTION NAME: PORT: STBD:

C0 Clutch Pressure Interlock
C1 Clutch Interlock Delay
C2 Proportional (Reversal)
Pause
C3 Proportional (Reversal)
Pause Time
C4 Proportional (Reversal)
Pause Ratio

Table 30: Record Troll Functions

CODE: FUNCTION NAME: PORT: STBD:

L0 Troll Enable / Control Head
Troll Lever Range
L1 Troll Valve Function
L2 Troll Minimum Pressure
L3 Troll Maximum Pressure
L4 Troll Throttle Limit
L5 Troll Pulse Duration
L6 Troll Pulse Percentage
L7 Lock Up percentage (Hurth
Only)
Only use when L106 or
L107 is selected.

Page 7-53
7 SEA TRIALS

Table 31: Troubleshooting Functions

CODE: FUNCTION NAME: PORT: STBD:

H2 High Side Driver Fault Detection Enable

7-9.3 Comments (Please use additional paper as necessary):

7-9.3.1 General Installation Condition

7-9.3.2 Any Irregularities:

Is the Installation and Troubleshooting Manual on board?

Is a copy of this completed Report placed in the Installation and Troubleshooting Manual on board?

INSPECTOR_______________________________________________ DATE_________________

MAIL A COMPLETED COPY TO:

ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, LLC. 12125 HARBOUR REACH DRIVE, STE B MUKILTEO, WA 98275

OR FAX TO: SERVICE DEPARTMENT 425-493-1569

Page 7-54
8 CONTROL OPTIONS

8 CONTROL OPTIONS
8-1 External Alarm Capability
CAUTION: The Processor’s Alarm circuit is limited to a maximum current of 0.5 Amperes and a maximum
voltage of 100 Volts DC. Exceeding these limits will permanently damage the Alarm circuit.

NOTE: The following information applies to CruiseCommand Processors with a Processor Serial Number of
ZE01320 or HIGHER. If your Processor has a lower Serial Number and you will be using this option, contact
ZF Marine Electronics for guidance.

The Alarm Output of the Processor can be used to connect to an external alarm system supplied by others.
The use of this output by the customer is optional.

The Processor comes equipped with a normally OPEN relay contact for connection to an external Status
Indication circuit. The relay energizes, CLOSING the contact when the Circuit Board has power applied
and the software program is running normally. In the event of a power loss or the software program
detects an anomaly, the relay de-energizes and the contact OPENS.
Figure 49: Example of Control System Status Indication

Figure 50: Example of External Alarm Connection Requirements

8-1.1 Installation

The following items should be considered when designing and installing the Status Indication
Panel:

• A Power Wire Harness with Alarm Output must be used if an External Alarm is required.
• The External Status Indication Circuit must not use the same power source as the
Processor.
• Since the External Status Indication Circuit is activated on a loss of power to the Processor,
an On/Off Switch is strongly recommended.
• Figure 49: and Figure 50: are an example of a suitable circuit, but not necessarily the only
circuit configuration acceptable.
A) Plug the Power Wire Harness into the Processor’s Power connector.
B) Run the two-conductor Alarm cable to the location of the Status Indication Circuit.

Page 8-55
8 CONTROL OPTIONS

C) Connect the black and red conductors to the Status Indication Circuit as shown in
Figure 49: and Figure 50:.

8-2 Auxiliary (Backup) Control System

The Auxiliary (Backup) System (refered to as BU System hereafter) provides a control system which is
fully independent from the ZF Marine Electronics Control System. The BU System can control the gear
as well as the engine, but it does not include ZF Marine Electronics control logic, safety interlock and
timing circuits. In other words, there is no protection for operator errors, such as shifting into gear at
elevated rpm’s.

• Provides redundant throttle and clutch signals in the event of a failure of the Main Control
System.
• May be selected at any time by the operator.
• A full explanation of the installation, operation and adjustment of the BU System is provided in
the Installation Manual supplied with the BU System.

If this option is going to be used, please contact a ZF Marine Electronics Representative for further
information.

8-3 Clutch Pressure Interlock

NOTE: The Clutch Pressure Interlock C0 must be set to be used. Refer to the Section 5 - SET UP PROCEDURES
for information on setting Function Code C0.

The Clutch Pressure Interlock uses a Pressure Switch which monitors the Ahead and Astern Clutch
pressures to prevent high engine RPM when the clutch is not fully engaged.
The Pressure Switch must have a Normally Open (N.O.) contact that closes when adequate Clutch
pressure is reached. The primary function of the Interlock is to prevent high engine RPM when the
Clutch is not fully engaged. The Interlock option must be selected with Function Code C0. There are two
selectable methods of operation as described below:

8-3.1 C0 - Clutch Pressure Interlock Methods of Operation

8-3.1.1 01 - Installed

When selected, the Interlock will command the Throttle to Idle, if low or a loss of pressure
occurs while cruising. The Interlock is activated when the Pressure Switch’s contact opens for
the minimum period of time selected with Function Code C1.

If adequate Clutch pressure is not reached in the time programmed in Function Code E5,
throttle will only be allowed to increase to this commanded speed for the time programmed in
Function Code C1 and then returned to Idle.

The Throttle will remain at Idle until the Control Head’s lever is returned to Idle, the Pressure
Switch contact closes and a speed command above Idle is commanded.

8-3.1.2 02 - Throttle Clutch Pressure Interlock

This option is typically selected when the Clutch takes longer than five seconds to reach full
pressure. The Throttle will remain at Idle until there is a closure of the Pressure Switch’s
contact. This prevents speeds above Idle prior to full Clutch engagement.

In the event of a loss of Clutch pressure while cruising, the Throttle will be returned to Idle
after the time selected with Function Code C1 has expired. Once a closure of the Switch is
Page 8-56
8 CONTROL OPTIONS

sensed, indicating adequate pressure, the Throttle immediately returns to the

commanded signal, without having to return the Control Head lever to Idle first, as is the case
with Value 01.

Figure 51: Clutch Pressure Switch with Processor Harness Diagram

8-3.2 Installation

The installation of the Clutch Pressure Switch is the same for both methods of operation. (Refer to
the above Figures.)

A) Install a Shuttle Valve on or near the Transmission.

B) Connect hydraulic line from the Ahead and Astern Clutches.
C) Connect a hydraulic line that is no longer than 5 feet (1,524m)and at approximately the
same height between the Shuttle Valve and the Pressure Switch.
D) Connect the Power Wire Harness’s Clutch Pressure Interlock cable to the Pressure
Switch’s normally open contact.
E) Calibrate the Pressure Switch to close when adequate Clutch Pressure is reached. (Refer
to the Transmission Manufacturers Installation Manual)

8-4 Station Expander (SE)

The Processor allows up to four Remote Stations. The SE allows up to an additional four Remote Stations
for a total of eight Stations.
The SE and Processor communicate via the Serial Communication cable. Control Heads connected to the
SE offer all of the functionality of a standard Remote Station.

For detailed information on the operation, installation and adjustment of the SE, refer to the Station
Expander Installation Manual supplied with the Expander.

If this option is going to be used, please contact a ZF Marine Electronics Representative for further
information.

Page 8-57
9 PERIODIC CHECKS AND MAINTENANCE

9 PERIODIC CHECKS AND MAINTENANCE

The items listed below should be checked on an annual basis or less, when noted:

9-1 Control Heads

• Check the terminal strip for signs of corrosion or a loose connection.
• If used, disconnect the Deutsch connector and check the pins and sockets for signs of moisture
and corrosion.

9-2 Processor
• Check all teminal connections for signs of corrosion or loose connections.
• Un-plug and inspect all Deutsch connectors for signs of moisture or corrosion.

Page 9-58
APPENDIX A
MMC-280 Rev.L 12-04
ZF Marine Electronics, LLC
Mukilteo Plant
400 Series Standard Control Head Variations
This Service Sheet reflects all current variations of the standard 3-detent
ZF Marine Electronics 400 Series Control Heads.
Part Numbering Configurations Detents Available

REQUIREMENTS:
MicroCommander/ClearCommand: one (1) 8-Conductor Cable per Control Head lever.
Pluggable MicroCommander/ClearCommand: one (1) Control Head Harness per Control Head lever.
CruiseCommand: one (1) Control Head Harness per Control Head lever.
Included with the Control Head:
• Gasket
• Mounting screws and washers
• Terminals (For 8-Conductor or 1-Connector Harnesses)
• Watertight cable grip for the cable entrance on the Processor (For 8-Conductor)
When the Control Head is properly mounted on a console, it is spray proof from the top only. An adhe-
sive gasket must be used to seal it to the mounting surface. However, below the mounting surface it needs
protection from water or spray. Consider using a Weather Mount Enclosure, which is available from ZF
Marine Electronics.
MOUNTING AND INSTALLATION:
Select the desired mounting locations and make cutouts per template. Refer to the Dimensions Diagram.
Check that the four mounting screws will start into the Control Head. Remove the Control Head from the
cutout.
Remove the backing from the adhesive gasket and apply the gasket adhesive side to the console around
the cutout.
Run cable/harnesses between Processor and Control Head. Label both ends with Station it connects
(EXAMPLE: Port, Center, or Starboard; Port Thrust, Port Throttle; etc.)
There are two types of Control Head connections available: Plug or Terminal Connected. Both types
may be used with MicroCommander, ClearCommand, or CruiseCommand using the appropriate cable or
harness. Follow the appropriate steps for the Control Head that has been supplied for your system.
Type 1 - Pluggable
Plug Control Head cable into the pigtail at the Control Head. (Ensure the correct Processor Cable is being
plugged into the corresponding Control Head lever pigtail).
When connecting the plugs, ensure that the release button or buttons are depressed and held until plug is
fully connected or disconnected. Connecting or disconnecting plugs without depressing and holding the
release button or buttons will damage the plug.
ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, LLC 12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Fax (425) 493-1569
A-1
 Type 2 - Standard Cable
Strip back the PVC cover on the shielded cable approximately 2-1/2" (63,5mm) at the Control Head.
At the Control Head end of the cable strip and cut off the shielding and drain wire flush with the end of
the PVC cover (the drain wire at the Control Head is not connected to ground).
Strip 3/8" (9,5mm) insulation off each wire.
Twist the individual strands of the wires to minimize fraying.
Crimp a locking fork terminal (included with each Control Head) to each of the conductors.
Make connections to the Control Head as indicated in the following TERMINAL CONNECTIONS dia-
grams.
Dimensions

ALWAYS REFER TO THE

MANUAL THAT IS
SUPPLIED WITH THE
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR
ANY UNIQUE CONTROL
HEAD CONNECTIONS
FOR YOUR SYSTEM.

When cable connections

are complete, MOUNT
Control Head to the
console using the four (4)
mounting screws and
washers supplied with the
Control Head.

CABLE/HARNESS CONNECTIONS:
Dual Control Head Connections
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS

Cable/Jumper connections 5 and 7 at the Port and Starboard terminal block are direction sensitive.
MicroCommander/ClearCommand CruiseCommand/9000 Series
Port Lever: Starboard Lever: Port Lever: Starboard Lever:
Terminal 3 Red Terminal 3 Red Terminal 3 Red & JUMPER Terminal 3 Red & JUMPER
Terminal 5 Blue Terminal 5 Yellow Terminal 5 Blue Terminal 5 JUMPER
Terminal 7 Yellow Terminal 7 Blue Terminal 7 JUMPER Terminal 7 Blue

PLUGGABLE CONNECTIONS
Pluggable Control Heads are supplied with a harness pigtail for each lever. When disconnecting/connecting
the plugs, ensure that the release button or buttons are depressed and held until plug is fully disconnected or

A-2
connected. Disconnecting/connecting plugs without depressing and holding the release button or buttons
WILL damage the plug.
Aft Facing Control Heads

For dual lever Control Head Sta-

tions that have the user facing aft:
Reverse connections 5 and 7.
For single lever Control Head Sta-
tions that have the user facing aft
and the one Control Head lever on
the user’s right, reverse connec-
tions 5 and 7.

Handheld Control is a Station option. Contact your ZF Marine Electronics Dealer for further
information on Handheld requirements and options.

0.19 Diameter (4,8mm) through Holes

(4 holes)

ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, LLC 12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Fax (425) 493-1569
A-3
ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, LLC 12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Fax (425) 493-1569
A-4
MMC-329 Rev.C 8/03
ZF Marine Electronics, LLC
Mukilteo Plant
MC2000 Series Standard Control Head Variations
This Service Sheet reflects all current variations of the standard 3-detent ZF Marine Electronics
MC2000 Series Control Heads

Part Numbering Configurations Detents Available

REQUIREMENTS:
MicroCommander/ClearCommand: one (1) 8-Conductor Cable per Control Head lever.
Pluggable MicroCommander/ClearCommand: one (1) Control Head Harness per Control Head
lever.
CruiseCommand: one (1) Control Head Harness per Control Head lever.
Included with the Control Head:
• Mounting screws
• Terminals (For 8-Conductor or 1-Connector Harnesses)
• Watertight cable grip for the cable entrance on the Processor (For 8-Conductor)
When the Control Head is properly mounted on a console, it is spray proof from the top only. An
adhesive gasket is mounted on the bottom of the Control Head to seal it to the mounting surface.
However, below the mounting surface it needs protection from water or spray. Consider using a
Weather Mount Enclosure, which is available from ZF Marine Electronics.

MOUNTING AND INSTALLATION:

Select the desired mounting locations and make cutouts per template. Refer to the Dimensions
Diagram.
Check that the two mounting screws will start into the Control Head. Remove Control Head
from cutout.
Run cable/harnesses between Processor and Control Head. Label both ends with Station it con-
nects (EXAMPLE: Port, Center, or Starboard; Port Thrust, Port Throttle; etc.)

ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, L.L.C. Mukilteo, Washington

12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Telefax (425) 493-1569
A-5
 Dimensions

There are two types of Control Head connections available: Plug or Terminal
Connected. Both types may be used with MicroCommander, ClearCommand, or
CruiseCommand using the appropriate cable or harness. Follow the appropriate
steps for the Control Head that has been supplied for your system.
Standard Cable Pluggable
Strip back the PVC cover on the shielded cable approximately Plug Control Head cable into the
2-1/2" (63,5mm) at the Control Head. pigtail at the Control Head. (Ensure
At the Control Head end of the cable strip and cut off the the correct Processor Cable is being
plugged into the corresponding Control
shielding and drain wire flush with the end of the PVC cover
Head lever pigtail).
(the drain wire at the Control Head is not connected to
ground). When connecting the plugs, ensure
that the release button or buttons
Strip 3/8" (9,5mm) insulation off each wire. are depressed and held until plug is
Twist the individual strands of the wires to minimize fraying.
fully connected or disconnected.
Crimp a locking fork terminal (included with each Control Connecting or disconnecting plugs
Head) to each of the conductors. without depressing and holding the
Make connections to the Control Head as indicated in the fol-
release button or buttons will dam-
lowing TERMINAL CONNECTIONS diagrams. age the plug.
ALWAYS REFER TO THE MANUAL THAT IS SUPPLIED WITH THE CONTROL SYSTEM
FOR ANY UNIQUE CONTROL HEAD CONNECTIONS FOR YOUR SYSTEM.
When cable connections are complete, MOUNT Control Head to the console using the two (2)
mounting screws and washers supplied with the Control Head.

A-6
CABLE/HARNESS CONNECTIONS:
Dual Control Head Connections
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS

Cable/Jumper connections 5 and 7 at the Port and Starboard terminal block are direction sensitive.
MicroCommander/ClearCommand CruiseCommand/9000 Series
Port Lever: Starboard Lever: Port Lever: Starboard Lever:
Terminal 3 Red Terminal 3 Red Terminal 3 Red & JUMPER Terminal 3 Red & JUMPER
Terminal 5 Blue Terminal 5 Yellow Terminal 5 Blue Terminal 5 JUMPER
Terminal 7 Yellow Terminal 7 Blue Terminal 7 JUMPER Terminal 7 Blue

PLUGGABLE CONNECTIONS
Pluggable Control Heads are supplied with a harness pigtail for each lever. When
disconnecting/connecting the plugs, ensure that the release button or buttons are
depressed and held until plug is fully disconnected or connected. Disconnecting/
connecting plugs without depressing and holding the release button or buttons
WILL damage the plug.

Aft Facing Control Heads

For dual lever Control Head Sta-

tions that have the user facing aft:
Reverse connections 5 and 7.
For single lever Control Head Sta-
tions that have the user facing aft
and the one Control Head lever on
the user’s right, reverse connec-
tions 5 and 7.

Handheld Control is an option. Contact your ZF Marine Electronics Dealer for further informa-
tion on Handheld requirements and options.

ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, L.L.C. Mukilteo, Washington

12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Telefax (425) 493-1569
A-7
ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, L.L.C. Mukilteo, Washington
12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Telefax (425) 493-1569
A-8
 0.25 Diameter (6,1mm) through Holes
(2 Holes)

ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, L.L.C. Mukilteo, Washington

12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Telefax (425) 493-1569
A-9
.

ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, L.L.C. Mukilteo, Washington

12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Telefax (425) 493-1569
A-10
MMC-307 Rev.G 8/03
ZF Marine Electronics, LLC
Mukilteo Plant
700 Series Standard Control Head Variations
This Service Sheet reflects all current variations of the standard 3-detent ZF Marine
Electronics 700 Series Control Heads.
Part Numbering Configurations Detents Available

REQUIREMENTS:
MicroCommander/ClearCommand: one (1) 8-Conductor Cable per Control Head lever.
Pluggable MicroCommander/ClearCommand: one (1) Control Head Harness per Control Head
lever.
CruiseCommand: one (1) Control Head Harness per Control Head lever.
Included with the Control Head:
• (4) Flat-washer - Stainless Steel, 1/4 inch
• (4) Screw - Stainless Steel, Philip Pan Head, 1/4 inch-20 x 1-3/4 inch
• (4) Nut - Stainless Steel, 1/4 inch-20
• (14) Terminal - Flanged For, #6
• (2) Liquid Tight Connector (in addition to those installed at the factory)
When the Control Head is properly mounted on a console, the Control Head is watertight.
Dimensions

ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, L.L.C. Mukilteo, Washington

12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Telefax (425) 493-1569
A-11
MOUNTING AND INSTALLATION:
Select the desired mounting locations and drill screw and cable holes as indicated on the tem-
plate diagram. Refer to the Dimensions Diagram on the next page.
Run cable/harnesses between Processor and Control Head. Label both ends with the Station it
connects (EXAMPLE: Port, Center, or Starboard; Port Thrust, Port Throttle; etc.)
There are two types of Control Head connections available: Plug or Terminal Connected. Both
types may be used with MicroCommander, ClearCommand, or CruiseCommand using the
appropriate cable or harness. Follow the appropriate steps for the Control Head that has been
supplied for your system.
Standard Cable Pluggable
Remove the six screws holding the bottom cover of the Control Plug Control Head cable into
Head housings and set aside. the pigtail at the Control
Insert cable through the correct cable grip in the bottom cover. Head. (Ensure the correct Proces-
Strip back the PVC cover on the shielded cable approximately 2-1/ sor Cable is being plugged into the
corresponding Control Head lever
2" (63,5mm) at the Control Head. pigtail).
At the Control Head end of the cable strip and cut off the shielding When connecting the plugs,
and drain wire flush with the end of the PVC cover (the drain wire ensure that the release button
at the Control Head is not connected to ground). or buttons are depressed and
Strip 3/8" (9,5mm) insulation off each wire. held until plug is fully con-
Twist the individual strands of the wires to minimize fraying. nected or disconnected. Con-
Crimp a locking fork terminal (included with each Control Head) to necting or disconnecting
each of the conductors. plugs without depressing and
Make connections to the Control Head as indicated in the following holding the release button or
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS diagrams. buttons will damage the plug.

ALWAYS REFER TO THE MANUAL THAT IS

SUPPLIED WITH THE CONTROL SYSTEM
FOR ANY UNIQUE CONTROL HEAD CON-
NECTIONS FOR YOUR SYSTEM.

When cable connections are complete:

Replace Control Head bottom cover using
the six (6) mounting screws removed ear-
lier. Ensure seal is in place.
Tighten watertight cable grip(s).
Remove front cover from the Control Head
Mount Control Head with supplied hard-
ware.
Replace front cover when mounting is com-
plete.

A-12
CABLE/HARNESS CONNECTIONS:
Dual Control Head Connections
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS

Cable/Jumper connections 5 and 7 at

the Port and Starboard terminal
block are direction sensitive.

585CE and Earlier MicroCommander

and MS Series ClearCommand
Port Lever: Starboard Lever:
Terminal 3 Red Terminal 3 Red
Terminal 5 Blue Terminal 5 Yellow
Terminal 7 Yellow Terminal 7 Blue

CruiseCommand, 9000 Series, Plug-

gable 585CE MicroCommander and
Pluggable MS Series ClearCommand
Port Lever: Starboard Lever:
Terminal 3 Terminal 3
Red & JUMPER Red & JUMPER
Terminal 5 Blue Terminal 5 JUMPER
Terminal 7 JUMPER Terminal 7 Blue

PLUGGABLE CONNECTIONS
Pluggable Control Heads are supplied with a harness pigtail for each lever. When disconnecting/
connecting the plugs, ensure that the release button or buttons are depressed and held until plug
is fully disconnected or connected. Disconnecting/connecting plugs without depressing and
holding the release button or buttons WILL damage the plug.

Aft Facing Control Head

For dual lever Control Head Sta-

tions that have the user facing aft:
Reverse connections 5 and 7.
For single lever Control Head Sta-
tions that have the user facing aft
and the one Control Head lever on
the user’s right, reverse connec-
tions 5 and 7.

Handheld Control is a Station option. Contact your ZF Marine Electronics Dealer for further
information on Handheld requirements and options.

ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, L.L.C. Mukilteo, Washington

12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Telefax (425) 493-1569
A-13
 TEMPLATE
ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, L.L.C. Mukilteo, Washington
12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Telefax (425) 493-1569
A-14
ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, L.L.C. Mukilteo, Washington
12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Telefax (425) 493-1569
A-15
ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, L.L.C. Mukilteo, Washington
12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Telefax (425) 493-1569
A-16
MMC-279 Rev.B 7/02
ZF Marine Electronics, LLC
Mukilteo Plant
400 Series Weather Mount Enclosure

Single or Dual
Control Head

Gasket

Control Head .75 inch Diameter Hole

Mounting Locate where required.
Holes (two if Dual Control Head)

3.54
Enclosure (89,9mm)

Watertight
Cable Grip
(two if Dual Control Head)
6.29
(159,8mm)

4.72
10241 (119,9mm)

Deck Mount or Exposed Mount

Ideal for outside Weather Mount
To prevent internal condensation and moisture build up the mount is drilled to allow air circulation.
Part No. 12110

.
ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, L.L.C. Mukilteo, Washington
12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Telefax (425) 493-1569
A-17
A-18
 Deutsch Connector Assembly
DT Type
Step 1: Contact Removal Step 2: Wire Stripping
Solid Contacts
Contact Part Wire Gauge Strip Length
1. Remove wedgelock using
needlenose pliers or a hook Number Range (inches)
shaped wire. Pull wedge
straight out. 0460-202-20141 20 AWG .156-.218
0462-201-20141 20 AWG .156-.218

0460-202-16141 16, 18 & 20 AWG .250-.312

2. To remove the contacts, 0462-201-16141 16, 18 & 20 AWG .250-.312
gently pull wire backwards,
while at the same time 0460-215-16141 14 AWG .250-.312
releasing the locking finger 0462-209-16141 14 AWG .250-.312
by moving it away from the
contact with a screwdriver. 0460-204-12141 12 & 14 AWG .222-.284
0462-203-12141 12 & 14 AWG .222-.284

0460-204-08141 8 & 10 AWG .430-.492

3. Hold the rear seal in
0462-203-08141 8 & 10 AWG .430-.492
place, as removing the
contact may displace the
0460-204-0490 6 AWG .430-.492
seal.
0462-203-04141 6 AWG .430-.492

Step 3: Contact Crimping Step 4: Contact Insertion

Use Crimp Tool #HDT48-00
1. Strip insulation from wire.
(See Step 2). 1. Grasp crimped contact
2. Raise selector knob and approximately (25.2 mm) one
rotate until arrow is aligned with inch behind the contact barrel.
wire size to be crimped.
3. Loosen locknut, turn adjust-
ing screw in until it stops.

2. Hold connector with rear

4. Insert contact with barrel up. grommet facing you.
Turn adjusting screw counter–
clockwise until contact is flush
with indentor cover. Tighten
locknut.
3. Push contact straight into
connector grommet until a click
is felt. A slight tug will confirm
5. Insert wire into contact. that contact is properly locked
Contact must be centered in place.
between indicators. Close
handles until crimp cycle is 4. Once all contacts are in place,
completed. insert wedgelock with arrow pointing
6. Release handles and remove toward exterior locking mechanism.
crimped contact. The wedgelock will snap into place.
Rectangular wedges are not oriented.
They may go in either way.
7. Inspect terminal to ensure NOTE: The receptacle is shown –use the
that all strands are in crimp same procedure for plug.
barrel.NOTE: Tool must be
readjusted for each type/size
of contact. Use HDT04-08 for
size 8 and 4 contacts.
(800) 223-1236

A-19
A-20
S-214 Rev.F 3/05
ZF Marine Electronics, LLC
Mukilteo Plant
Automatic Power Selector (APS) Model: 13505
A) GENERAL INFORMATION
The APS (Automatic Power Selector), Model 13505, provides a simple, solid state solution to the
need for routing redundant DC power sources for vital electronic equipment while maintaining
isolation of the DC power sources.
Two independent batteries rated at the same nominal voltage are wired to separate terminals on
the APS and internal diodes maintain total isolation between them. A single output terminal is
wired to the ZF Marine Electronics Propulsion Control System.
The APS is rated for loads of up to 70 Amps on 12-24V systems. The unit is ruggedly constructed
with heavy-duty wiring studs and epoxy-potted components in an anodized aluminum case.
B) APS SPECIFICATIONS
Model: 13505
Maximum Load Current: 70 amps
Operating Temperature: -40 degrees C to +80 degrees C; derate linearly from 100% @ 50
degrees C to 70% @ 80 degrees C
Voltage Drop: 0.7 VDC @ 50% load; 0.9 VDC @ full load
Dimensions: 3.25" x 4.5" x 3.1" (8,3 x 11,4 x 7,9 cm)
C) MATERIALS PROVIDED
The single APS is supplied with a hardware packet containing (6) hex nuts, (3) lock washers, (4)
self-tapping mounting screws, (1) instructions diagram.

NOTE: Not all of the hardware will be used in the installation; some spares are provided.
Nut size is M-6.

The twin APS is supplied with (2) single APS hardware packets.
D) INSTALLATION
Refer to the installation Drawing 11488D.
1. Shut off all charging sources and disconnect the negative (ground) side of each battery
which will be wired to the APS.
2. Mount the APS(s) in a suitable location which will keep wire runs to a minimum length,
and is (preferably) ventilated, for cooler operation. The case of the APS is electrically iso-
lated from the internal diodes, so mounting on either a metal or non-metal surface is
acceptable.
3. Complete the wiring as indicated on either Drawing 11488D-1 or 11488D-2.
4. Reconnect the negative battery posts.
E) IMPORTANT NOTE ABOUT BATTERY SOURCES
Whenever the load is turned on, it can be drawing power from the batteries. Therefore, if the
batteries are not simultaneously being recharged, or if charging will not be available for an
extended period, it is recommended that the load be shut off to prevent complete discharge of
batteries.

ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, L.L.C. Mukilteo, Washington

12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Telefax (425) 493-1569
A-21 180101D 3/05
A-22 180101D 3/05
Drawing 11488D-1 Twin Screw Single APS Connection & Alternate Remote Switch

A-23
A-24
Drawing 11488D-2 Twin Screw Dual APS Connections

A-25
A-26
Drawing 11488D-3 APS Notes Page

A-27
A-28
 ZF Marine Electronics, LLC
Mukilteo Plant
MMC-287 Rev.F 5/06

Grounding (Bonding)
Grounding (Bonding) - 46 CFR 111.05 and ABYC Section E-11

Grounding (Bonding) should be done according to ABYC Section E-11 and Code of Federal Regulations 46
CFR 111.05.
Each grounded system must have only one point of connection to ground regardless of the number of
power sources operating in parallel in the system
A vessel's hull must not carry current as a conductor. A metallic hull, or the bonding and DC grounding
systems, shall not be used as a return conductor.
There are some limited exceptions: (1) Impressed current cathodic protection systems. (2) Limited and
locally grounded systems, such as a battery system for engine starting that has a one-wire system and the
ground lead connected to the engine. (3) Insulation level monitoring devices if the circulation current does
not exceed 30 milliamperes under the most unfavorable conditions. (4) Welding systems with hull return
except vessels subject to 46 CFR Subchapter D.
Grounding conductors should be green or green with a yellow stripe.
References:
CFR Sec. 111.05-13, Sec. 111.05-11
ABYC E-11 11.5.2.2, ABYC E-11.4, ABYC 11-18.
Groundinga

a Grounding is used courtesy of American Boat and Yacht Council.

All parts of figure except processors and processor connection
2003 American Boat and Yacht Council

Metal - Hull Vessels

The hull of a metal hull vessel may serve as the common grounding conductor. If it is desirable for the
item being installed to be bonded to the vessel grounding system, and the installation or mounting method
does not provide the desired path, a separate grounding conductor may be required.
ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, L.L.C. Mukilteo, Washington
12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Telefax (425) 493-1569
Page A-29
A-30
MMC-288 Rev.E 8-03
ZF Marine Electronics, LLC
Mukilteo Plant
References and Parts Source
A) REFERENCES
1. American Boat & Yacht Council (ABYC)
3069 Solomons Island Road
Edgewater, MD 21037-1416
E-3 Wiring Identification on Boats
E-11 AC and DC Electrical Systems on Boats
H-2.4e or 32.4g Ambient Temp. 50 degrees C
P-24 Electric/Electronic Propulsion Controls
2. Code of Federal Regulations
33 CFR 183 Subpart I - Electrical Systems
33 CFR 183.410 Ignition protection
33 CFR 183.415 Grounding
33 CFR 183.425 Conductors: General
33 CFR 183.430 Conductors in circuit of less than 50 Volts
33 CFR 183.445 Conductors: Protection
33 CFR 183.455 Over-current and Protection: General
46 CFR 111.01 - 15(b) Ambient Temp. Machinery Spaces 50 degrees C
46 CFR 111.05- System Grounds
3. Society of Automotive Engineers
400 Commonwealth Drive
Warrendale, PA 15096
J1171 External Ignition Protection
J1428 Marine Circuit Breakers
J378 Marine Engine Wiring
4. National Marine Manufacturers Association
401 North Michigan Avenue
Chicago, IL 60611
5. Underwriters Laboratories
B) PARTS SOURCE
Anti-Static Wrist Strap P/N 517 [Thomas & Betts (P/N AWCC)]
Automatic Power Selector P/N 13505
Circuit Breaker- UL Approved P/N 810 [E-T-A (P/N 41-2-514-LN2-10)]
Fuse P/N 1030 [Bussman (P/N. GDC-1A)]
Relay 12 VDC P/N 1114 [Potter-Brumfield (P/N KRPA5D6-12)]
Relay 24 VDC P/N 1122 [Potter-Brumfield (P/N KRPA5D6-24)]
Service Field Test Unit (Break-out Box) P/N 13927
WAGO Tool P/N 397 [WAGO (P/N 236-332)]
Field Test Control Head - Dual P/N 14000
ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, L.L.C. Mukilteo, Washington
12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Telefax (425) 493-1569
A-31
A-32
MMC-165 Rev. F 7-07

Electronic Propulsion Control Systems Limited Warranty

A. Limited Warranty: Your ZF Marine Electronics product has designed and manufactured by experienced
engineers and craftmen. ZF Marine Electronics, LLC, warrants for the period indicated below, each product
manufactured by ZF Marine Electronics, LLC, to be free from defects in materials and workmanship. If
during the applicable warranty period is determined by ZF Marine Electronics, LLC to be in breach of this
limited warranty, ZF Marine Electronics, LLC, at its option will repair or replace the defective product.

B. Warranty Exclusions: This warranty covers only failures due to defects in materials or workmanship that
occurs during normal use. This warranty does not cover damage that occurs in shipment, failures that are
caused by products not supplied by ZF Marine Electronics, LLC, failures that result from installation that is
not in compliance with ZF Marine Electronics specifications, accident, misuse, abuse, neglect, water
damage, mishandling, misapplication, set-up adjustments, improper maintenance, alterations, modification
or service by anyone other than a ZF Marine Electronics Authorized Service Center, damage that is
attributable to acts of God or other causes unrelated to defects in materials and workmanship.

C. Warranty Period: the length of the applicable warranty period will depend on the use of your vessel. For
Commercial Craft the standard warranty period is for 24 months from the date of original shipment by
ZFME or 12 months after commissioning of the craft, whichever occurs first. A commercial craft is defined
as, any vessel used for any commercial purpose including but not limited to any use as a workboat,
passenger vessel, charter or rental fleet.
For Pleasure Craft the warranty period is 36 months from the date of original shipment by ZFME or 24
months after commissioning of the craft whichever comes first. A Pleasure Craft is any vessel that is or has
not been used for any commercial purpose including but not limited to any use as a workboat, passenger,
charter or rental fleet.
Repair or replacement parts provided under this Warranty will not be covered by the remainder of the
unexpired warranty in effect on the complete unit.

D. No Coverage Under Warranty: The exclusive remedy under this warranty is the repair or replacement of
the defective component and this warranty specifically does not provide coverage for:
1.Towing or transportation of the vessel, or travel to and from the job site or vessel.
2.Original installation charges or start-up costs.
3.Loss of use or income from the vessel and/or rental of equipment during the performance of warranty
repairs.
E. To Obtain Warranty Service: Please go to www.zf-marine.com or Call 1-425-583-1900 or (US only) 1-800-
545-5455 for the nearest ZF Marine Electronics Factory or Authorized Service Center.
4.The Service Center will contact ZF Marine Electronics Service Department for a Service Return Autho-
rization (SRA) number. Return th eproduct freight prepaid, marked clearly with the SRA number and
description of the malfunction.
5. If there are defects covered by this warranty, ZF Marine Electronics will, at its option, either repair or
replace the defective part or product. If after inspection, ZF Marine Electronicsm determines that the
product us not defective, ZF Marine Electronics will charge a atesting fee and return the product to the
sender, freight collect.
6. Repair or replacement during the warranty period will not extend the warranty period.
7.All SRA claims must be requested and submitted within 30 days from date of repair service.
8.Claims for over 3 hours labor must be pre-approved by the ZF Marine Electronics Serive Department

This Warranty is expressly in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied. Except to the extent prohibited by applicable
law, ZF Marine Electronics hereby disclaims all other implied or express warranties of any kind, including warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Under no circumstrances shall ZF Marine Electronics be liable for any
incidental or consequential damages sustained in connection with the product or its use, including any costs or damages
which result from loss of use of the product or any engine or boat with which it is used. ZF Marine Electronics does not
authorize any representative or agent to assume for it any obligation or liability other than those expressly set forth above.
Some States and other jurisdictions do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or the exclusion or
limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so above limitations may not apply to you. All implied warranties, if any,
are limited to the duration of this express warranty. This warranty gives you legal rights. and you may have other rights
which may may vary from State to State.

A-37
Page A-34
MMC-163 Rev.C 10/04
ZF Marine Electronics, LLC
Mukilteo Plant
Warranty Registration
Processor, Serial # Serial #
Number of Remote Stations
Purchase Date
Dealer's Name
Installer's Name
Phone Number ( )
Cell Number ( )
Fax Number ( )
E-Mail Address
Purchaser's Name
Street Address
City, State, Zip
Phone Number ( )
YOUR VESSEL:
Engine, Make & Model
Length
Manufacturer
ZF Marine Electronics, LLC. Product First Seen At:
Boat Show Dealer Magazine Friend

ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, L.L.C. Mukilteo, Washington

12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Telefax (425) 493-1569
Page A-35
ZF Marine Electronics, LLC.
12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B
Mukilteo, WA 98275

Page A-36
APPENDIX B
B1 TROUBLESHOOTING GENERAL

B1 TROUBLESHOOTING GENERAL
The ZF Marine Electronics Control System consists of one Processor per engine, typically mounted in the engine
room, and one to four Control Heads located at the vessel’s Remote Stations.

In the event that a malfunction occurs, review the appropriate System Diagram and become familiar with the
various components, their functions and locations on the vessel.

The following Sections are a list of the main components that make up a typical system, along with a brief
description of their functions:

B1-1 Control System Examples

B1-1.1 785CE (Throttle Electronic, Clutch Solenoid or Clutch/Troll Solenoid, up to Four pluggable
Stations) Processor

The 785CE is designed to precisely control speed and direction on vessels equipped with electronic
Throttle, solenoid Clutch or Clutch/Troll selection.

B1-2 Typical System Main Components

B1-2.1 Control Head

The primary function of the Control Head is to send out a variable DC voltage to the Processor.
This DC voltage is representative of the Control Head’s present lever position. In addition to the
primary function, the Control Head also has audible (Sound Transducer) and visual (LED) status
indications, along with a Transfer Button for taking command and performing other system
functions.

B1-2.2 Processor

The Processor receives the variable DC voltage from the Control Head(s) and converts these inputs
to the appropriate electronic or electric outputs at the correct time and sequence to the Governor
and Gear Box. The information regarding throttle type, throttle/ clutch sequencing, etc., are all
stored on memory within the Processor.

B1-2.3 Power Source

All electronic equipment must have power in order to operate. Ensuring a properly charged reliable
power source is available and cruicial.

The Processor requires a 12 or 24 VDC power system.

The minimum voltage at which the Processor will continue to operate is 8.00 VDC. The maximum
allowable voltage is 30 VDC. Exceeding these limits will not damage the Processor, but will render
it unusable temporarily. The power supply must be capable of delivering 10 amperes to each
Processor on a continual basis and current surges up to 20 amperes.

All cable calculations should be based on a 10 ampere draw with no more than 10% voltage drop.

B1-2.4 Electrical Cables and Harnesses

The function of the Electrical Cables and Harnesses are to move electrical information from one
point to another. The ZF Marine Electronics’ System has pluggable Harnesses. These Harnesses
may have plugs on one end or both, depending on its purpose.

Page B1-1
B1 TROUBLESHOOTING GENERAL

There are Harnesses available for Control Head Interface, DC Power, Start Interlock,
Clutch Oil Pressure Interlock and External System Status Indication Circuit.

In addition, the application may require Harnesses for one or more of the following:
• Engine Interface
• Serial Communication
• Shift Interface
• Shift/Troll Interface
• Tachometer Sensor Signal

Prior to attempting to troubleshoot the System, get as much information as possible from the owner or
operator. Inspect the System for signs of misadjustments, loose connections, physical damage or water
incursion.

Pay special attention to the following items:

• DC Power Source
• Component Location
• Component Condition
• Interconnecting Wiring and Harnesses
• Wire Terminations
• Plug and Socket Pins

Page B1-2
B2 TROUBLESHOOTING QUESTIONS

B2 TROUBLESHOOTING QUESTIONS
Prior to lifting a tool or stepping on board the vessel, many problems can be resolved by asking the customer the
following basic questions:

A) Is the System installed on a Single, Twin or Multiple Screw vessel?

• If the System is installed on a Single Screw vessel, this question does not have much value in
narrowing down the source of the problem.
• If the System is installed on a Twin or more Screw application, this question is quite useful, if
you ask the following question.
1 Does the problem or symptom occur on the Port, Starboard or both sides?
• If the problem or symptom occurs on one side only, you have effectively eliminated 50% of
the possible causes. For example, the symptom only occurs on the Port side. All of the
components on the Starboard side have been eliminated as potential causes.
• If the problem occurs on both the Port and Starboard sides, you must ask yourself: What
do both sides have in common? Most likely answer to your question would be the DC
Power source.
B) What is the Part Number and Serial Number of the Processor?

Whenever the factory is called for technical assistance, the part number and serial number will be
required. These numbers provide the Service Technician information about the operating
characteristics of the Processor. The numbers are located on the Processor’s front cover.

C) How many Remote Stations are there? (If only one Remote Station is present, not much will be gained
by asking this question. However, if more than one Remote Station is being used, command should be
taken from one of the other Stations to see if the problem occurs from another Station.)
• If the problem occurs from more than one Remote Station, the odds are that the Control Heads
are not the cause of the trouble.
• If the problem occurs at one Remote Station only, there is a greater chance of the Control Head
or the Control Head Harness of being the cause.

D) Are any tones generated when the problem occurs?

The tones are used to bring the operator’s attention to a possible condition or problem.

The following basic tones can be produced on all Systems (refer to Section B5 - AUDIBLE TONES):

• Slow Repetitive Tone

• One Long- Three Short Tones
• Steady Tone
• Three Second Steady Tone
The following tone can be produced on all Systems using Solenoid Clutches (refer to Section B5 -
AUDIBLE TONES):

• One Long - One Short Tone

E) Are there any Error Messages displayed on the Processor’s Display LED?

In addition to generating a tone, at any time the system detects a malfunction or fault, an error
message will be displayed at the Processor. Refer to Section 8 - Table B8-1 "Basic Control System
Error Codes", for an explanation of the errors.

F) What is the status of the Control Head in command’s red LED?

Page B2-3
B2 TROUBLESHOOTING QUESTIONS

The red LED(s) will be in one of the following states:

Lit Steady

When the red LED is Lit Steady, this indicates that the Station is in command and in Normal
operative mode.

Not Lit

When the red LED is Not Lit, that Station is not in command, or there is no power to the
Control System.

Blinking Slowly

A Slow Blinking red LED indicates that the Control Head is in Throttle Only Mode (Warm-up
Mode).

Blinking Rapidly

A red LED that is Blinking Rapidly indicates that the System is in Troll Mode.
G) Has anything on the vessel changed shortly prior to or when the problem arose?
This question is often overlooked, but should be considered. Obvious changes such as additions or
changes to the electrical/ electronic equipment onboard can affect the electrical load and in turn
the Processor’s power supply.

Ask the operator if any changes or maintenance to the vessel’s machinery have occurred lately.
Items which are significant to you, the technician, may not seem so to the casual owner or operator.
An example would be changes to the engine’s fuel system.

Ask about changes, that when initially considered, appear to have nothing to do with the Control
System. An example where this really occurred was on a vessel which had recently been repainted.
For unknown reasons, the painter took it upon himself to disconnect the connections at a Control
Head and then reconnected it incorrectly.

In many cases, these simple questions can resolve a problem with no further action from you, the technician.
Take the time to consider these questions. In the long run, you will save yourself and the customer a lot of time
and money.

Page B2-4
B3 TROUBLESHOOTING PROBLEM RESOLUTION

B3 TROUBLESHOOTING PROBLEM RESOLUTION

If the problem could not be resolved by asking the questions in the previous section, a careful inspection of the
Control System may be the next step. Even in situations where the problem was found and corrected, it is good
practice to always perform a careful inspection of the entire Control System each and every time you are asked
aboard a boat.

Always verify that the installation of the System is in compliance with the Installation Manual by carefully
inspecting the following:

B3-1 DC Power
A) Ensure that the Processor(s) and Clutch is connected to a properly charged 12 or 24 VDC battery
through a 10 Ampere circuit breaker.
B) To ensure reliable power to the Processors an APS (Automatic Power Selector) is strongly
recommended. The APS take inputs from two separate power sources. Whichever power source is at
the higher voltage level, will be automatically switched through.
C) Refer to Automatic Power Selector information in Appendix A.

B3-2 Component Location

B3-2.1 Control Heads

There are virtually no restrictions regarding the location of the 400 Series and MC2000 Series
Control Heads, as long as the bottom is protected from the environment. The 500 Series Control
Heads must be mounted to a console and the 700 Series are waterproof from top to bottom.
Refer to Appendix A - Control Head Reference Sheet for Installation requirements.

B3-2.2 Processors

The Processors are typically mounted in the engine room, while maintaining a minimum distance
of 4 feet (1,22m) from sources of high heat and EMI (Electro Magnetic Interference) or RFI (Radio
Frequency Interference).

Refer to Section 3 - PLAN THE INSTALLATION for requirements.

B3-3 Component Condition

B3-3.1 Control Heads

Inspect for any signs of corrosion due to water incursion. If hard-wired, ensure that all the fork
connectors are properly secured to the terminal. Verify all wires are fully crimped and do not pull
loose.

B3-3.2 Processors
Inspect the Processor for any signs of physical damage.

B3-4 Interconnecting Wiring and Harnesses

A) Inspect the wire terminations for loose connections, corrosion or wire strands.
B) Inspect the Harness’s pins and sockets for bent pins, torn boots or any signs of corrosion.

Page B3-5
B3 TROUBLESHOOTING PROBLEM RESOLUTION

The first step in troubleshooting a problem with the Propulsion System is to determine if the problem is
with the Control System or something external to the System. In all cases a Control System malfunction will
alert the operator of the potential problem. This is accomplished through the audible tone emitted at all Remote
Stations. When an audible tone is emitted, it will be accompanied by an Error Message at the Processor. Also, in
many cases, the Control System will alert the operator to a problem external to the Control System.

The following are examples of components both internal and external to the Control System which could be a
source of trouble:

Table 1: Examples of Internal/External Components

Internal External
Processor DC Power Source
Control Head Engine
Interconnecting Wiring (Harnesses) Transmission
The following pages should give you a good guideline for making this determination. There is no need to
troubleshoot the system to any point further than one of the main components listed above. If the fault is found
to be with a Control System component, that component is simply replaced. If the fault is found to be with one
of the external components, replace or repair the defective component or contact a qualified mechanic.

Page B3-6
B4 TROUBLESHOOTING DIAGNOSTIC MENU

B4 TROUBLESHOOTING DIAGNOSTIC MENU

The Processor has built in diagnostics designed to assist the technician in determining the cause of a problem.
The following information is available to view at any time:
• Applied Battery Voltage
• Tachometer Sender Frequency
• Stations 1- 4 A/D’s
• Stations 1- 4 Transfer Button Status
• Software Revision Level
In order to access this information, follow the steps below:

A) Locate the Display LED on the Port or Starboard Processor. The Display LED
will have a running dash pattern moving from left to right while the program
is running in Normal Operation.
Figure 1: Display Function Code B) Depress the Up or Down Push Button to activate the Function Code List. The
characters A001 will be shown on the Display like Figure 1:
C) Depress the Up or Down Push Button repeatedly until H000 is displayed like
Figure 2:.
Figure 2: Display Troubleshooting
Function D) Depress and hold the Left and Right Push Buttons simultaneously until the H0
begins to blink. (Figure 3:) Release the Push Buttons; the applied battery
voltage will now be displayed:
• The displayed value is in “real time” and provides a rough estimate of the
DC voltage applied to the Processor. The reading is accurate to within
Figure 3: Display Function Blinking
Function Code is Blinking 0.50 DC. Refer to Figure 4:
E) In addition to the applied battery voltage, scrolling through the Diagnostics
Menu by pressing the Up or Down Push Button can also show the Tachometer
Sender Frequency (Figure 5:):

Figure 4: Example Display of Applied • The information shown is the actual frequency output by the Tachometer
Battery Voltage Sender. This signal is utilized in “Closed Loop” Synchronization or
“Closed Loop” Troll (future) systems
• The Control Head’s lever position, and the resulting output of the
Station’s Control Heads can always be monitored. This is regardless of
Figure 5: Example Display of Tach whether that Station is in command or not. Note the placement of the
Sensor Frequency
decimal points in the following examples, which show all Stations with
the lever positioned at the Neutral/Idle position. This will be covered in
further detail later.

Figure 6: Example Display Control Head Lever Current Positions

Station #1 Station #2 Station #3 Station #4

F) The current status of all the Control Head’s Transfer Buttons can be monitored
within the Diagnostic Menu. A 1 indicates a closure (depressed Transfer
Button) of the switch, while a 0 indicates an open switch.

Page B4-7
B4 TROUBLESHOOTING DIAGNOSTIC MENU

Figure 7: Example Display Control Head Transfer Button Status View

Station #1 Station #2 Station #3 Station #4

G) Depressing the Up or Down Push Button one more time will show the current
revision level of the software. This feature will provide invaluable information
in the years to come. Determining the characteristics or capabilities of a
certain Processor will be as simple as selecting this feature.
Figure 8: Example Display of Software Revision Level View

H) Pressing the Up or Down (Scroll) Push Button once more, returns you to the
Applied Battery Voltage.
I) The Diagnostic Menu can be exited two ways:
• Do not touch any Push Buttons for 5 minutes. The system will
automatically exit.
• Depress the Left Push Button until H000 appears. You may now scroll
through the Set Up Menu.

Page B4-8
B5 TROUBLESHOOTING AUDIBLE TONES

B5 TROUBLESHOOTING AUDIBLE TONES

As mentioned previously, there are various tones emitted from the Control Head if an error were to occur.

B5-1 Basic Control System Tones

These basic tones are as follows:

B5-1.1 Slow Repetitive Tone

The Slow Repetitive Tone, also referred to as the “Initialization Tone” is the tone you hear at all
Remote Stations when power is initially applied to the control system. When this tone is heard, you
know for a fact that the following are true:

• Power has just been applied to the system.

• The Software Program is running normally.
• The Processor is commanding the throttle to Idle.
• The Processor is commanding the clutch to Neutral.

This is a normal tone when power has first been applied to the Processor and no Control Head has
taken command. However, if during normal operation the engine’s throttle drops to Idle, followed
by the clutch to Neutral, the Control Head’s red LED goes out and a slow repetitive tone is heard at
all remote stations, the tone may be an indication of a problem. This indicates that the voltage at
the Processor has momentarily dropped below 8 VDC and then returned to a normal operational
level. This could be due to:
• Loose battery power cable connection.
• Under-charged or defective battery.
• Voltage drop due to current flow.

In order to pinpoint the exact cause of the low voltage at the Processor, perform the following
checks:

A) Check the Display on the Processor for Error Messages. Error Message 55 may appear
indicating Under Voltage. One or more of Error Messages 37 through 53 may also be
displayed. This is due to the momentary loss of serial communication between the two
Processors. Take note that the Under Voltage error is not only dependent on low voltage,
it is also dependent on the duration of the low voltage. The possibility exists that an
error message would not be displayed if the duration of the low voltage was short
enough. However, the other symptoms mentioned above still occur.
B) In either case, follow the procedure listed under Section B4 - DIAGNOSTIC MENU until
the Applied Battery Voltage is displayed. Take note of the applied voltage.
C) Go to the battery or Main Distribution Panel which is feeding power to the Processor.
With a DC Voltmeter, measure the voltage at this power source. The battery voltage
should be greater than 12.4 Volts in 12 VDC systems and 24.8 Volts in 24 VDC systems. If
not, the battery or it’s charging system needs servicing.
D) The voltage differential between the power source and the Processor should not exceed
1.2 Volts in 12 VDC systems and 2.4 Volts in 24 VDC systems. If so, there is high
resistance somewhere between the battery and Processor.
NOTE: If an APS is being utilized in the power circuit, take into account the 0.7 VDC forward voltage drop of
the diodes. This would increase the permissible differential between power source and Processor from 1.2 to
1.9 VDC in 12 VDC circuits and 2.4 to 3.1 VDC in 24 VDC circuits.

Page B5-9
B5 TROUBLESHOOTING AUDIBLE TONES

E) High resistance, resulting in a differential voltage of 1.2 Volts (12 VDC Systems)
or 2.4 Volts (24 VDC Systems) or greater, may be the result of corroded or tarnished
connections, dirty or pitted relay contacts or an improperly sized power cable.
F) If the voltage differential is less than 1.2 Volts (12 VDC Systems) or 2.4 Volts (24 VDC
Systems), which is what you would typically expect, a loose connection may exist
between the power source and the Processor. The vibration experienced while the
vessel is underway may intermittently cause the circuit to open. Check all the
connections between the power source and the Processor for loose bolts, nuts, etc.

B5-1.2 One Long - Three Short Tones

This tone indicates that there is an invalid command signal at the Station-in-Command.

The Processor expects a DC voltage, representative of the Control Head’s present lever position.
This voltage is referred to as the “Command Signal”. In normally functioning Control Heads, the
command signal is between approximately 0.5VDC at Full Astern to 4.40 VDC at Full Ahead.
The command signal is converted by the Processor to a digital representation, referred to as an A/D
Count. More on A/D Counts later. If the command signal drops below or exceeds this range, the
tone will be generated.

At the same time the tone is heard, throttle command drops to Idle and the clutch will be
commanded to Neutral. The following items will cause this to occur:
• An open or high resistance connection between the Control Head and Processor.
• Out of calibration Control Head.
• A defective Control Head.

The exact cause of the malfunction can be found as follows:

A) Check the Processor’s Display for error messages. Most likely, one of error messages 13
thru 28 will be shown. The exact number shown depends on which remote station is
experiencing the problem and whether the command signal was too high or too low.
B) Enter the Diagnostic Menu as outlined in Section B4 - DIAGNOSTIC MENU.
C) Depress the Up or Down (Scroll) Push Button until the appropriate Remote Station is
displayed.
• The Remote Station are identified by the position of the decimal points.
• Station 1 has no decimal point after the first digit to the far right. The remaining
three digits all have decimal points.
• If the digit to the far left had no decimal point following it, but the remaining
three do, this would represent Station 4.

Figure 9: Display Examples of Remote Stations

Station 1 Station 2 Station 3 Station 4

D) The examples above are shown with no Control Heads connected to any Remote
Stations. When a Control Head is connected, the appropriate A/D (Analog/Digital) value
for the present position of the Control Head’s lever will be shown, as in the following
examples:

Page B5-10
B5 TROUBLESHOOTING AUDIBLE TONES

Figure 10: Display Examples of Remote Stations A/D Values

Station 1 Station 2 Station 3 Station 4
(Neutral Commanded) (Full Ahead Commanded) (Full Astern Commanded) (No Control Head Connected)

E) An A/D value is 900 or greater, one of Error Codes 13 to 20 will be shown.

• If the A/D value is greater than 900, but less than 990, one of the following may be
the cause:
1 The Control Head’s potentiometer is out of calibration.
2 The potentiometer is defective.

In either case, it is recommended that the Control Head is replaced.

• If the A/D value is 995 or higher, one of the following may be the cause.
1 JUMPER between pins 3 and 5 (Right hand) Control Heads or pins 3 and 7
(Left Hand) Control Heads is disconnected.
2 If the LED is not lit and no audible tone is heard, the red wire connected
between pin 3 of the Control Head and pin 5 of the Processor is open.
F) If the A/D value is 100 or less, one of Error Codes 21- 28 will be shown.
• If the A/D value is less than 100, but greater than 75, the following may be the
cause:
1 The Control Head’s potentiometer is out of calibration.
2 The potentiometer is defective.
3 A high resistance connection exists on pin 6 (green wire) between the
Control Head and Processor.
• If the A/D value is less than 75:
1 There is an open wire between pin 6 (green wire) of the Control Head and
the Processor.
2 There is an open wire between pin 7 (blue wire) of a right hand Control
Head and the Processor.
3 There is an open wire between pin 5 (blue wire) of a left hand Control Head
and pin 7 (blue wire) of the Processor.

B5-1.3 Steady Tone

The Steady Tone is an indication to the operator that something has gone wrong within the Control
System. The Steady Tone will typically be accompanied by an Error Message on the Processor’s
Display. If the tone is heard, the Processor’s Display must be referred to in order to further
diagnosis the problem.

If the Transfer Button is shorted - Tone will cease when command is taken at another Station.

If the Transfer Button becomes shorted for 12 seconds or more during Normal Operation, a steady
tone will be produced at all Remote Stations as long as the Transfer Button remains shorted. Full
System control remains. Transferring to another Remote Station silences the Steady Tone.
Command cannot be regained at the Station until the problem is rectified.

Page B5-11
B5 TROUBLESHOOTING AUDIBLE TONES

B5-1.4 Three Second Steady Tone

This tone is generated when a fault is detected with the Troll ON/OFF Solenoid or Troll
Proportional Solenoid. The tone will also be accompanied with one or more of Error Messages 7 -
10. The System’s program/memory must be told of the existence of these solenoids in order to
activate this feature.

This tone is also generated with a stuck Control Head transfer button. Refer to Section B7 - STUCK
TRANSFER BUTTON.

B5-2 Clutch Solenoid Control System Tones

B5-2.1 One Long - One Short Tone

This tone indicates that there is some type of malvunction with one or more of the Clutch or
Neutral Solenoid Circuits. The exact nature of the malfunction can be further isolated as
indicated by the Error Message on the Processor Display.

There are six (6) different Error Messages, which one or more will be displayed in conjuction
with this tone depending on which solenoid and whether an Open or a short is detected.
Error Messages 1 - 6 will be shown.

The System’s program/memory must be told of the existence of these solenoids in order to
activate this feature. Refer to Section 5 - SET UP PROCEDURES for Function H2.

Page B5-12
B6 TROUBLESHOOTING REMOTE STATIONS

B6 TROUBLESHOOTING REMOTE STATIONS

B6-1 Transfer
In order to transfer command from one Remote Station to another, the following must occur:

• There must be a valid “Command Signal” at the Station being transferred to.
• The “Command Signal” must indicate that the Control Head’s lever(s) is at the Neutral/Idle
position.
• The Transfer Button must be depressed which takes the “Station Select” signal from 5.00 VDC
to 0.00 VDC.
If a transfer from one Remote Station to another is requested, but does not take place; the items required
for successful transfer can be tested as follows:

B6-2 Command Signal

• The Command Signal is a DC voltage which varies in relationship to the Control Head’s lever
position.
• The Processor provides each Control Head 5.00 +/- 0.20VDC, which is referred to as the
“Reference Voltage”.
• The Reference Voltage is applied to a 5K Ohm Potentiometer in the Control Head.
• The potentiometer’s “Wiper” taps off a portion of the Reference Voltage and sends it back to the
Processor.
• The amount of DC voltage which is tapped off, is dependant on the position of the Control
Head’s lever.
• When the lever is fully Astern, a small portion of the Reference Voltage is tapped off by the
wiper, and therefore, the voltage is at its lowest point (approximately 0.60 VDC).
• When the lever is positioned fully Ahead, a larger portion is tapped off and the voltage is at its
highest point (approximately 4.40 VDC).

B6-3 A to D Counts
Since all the calculations within the control system are performed digitally, these DC voltages are
expressed as and converted to a digital representation.
• The “Reference Voltage” (approximately 5.00 VDC) by which all analog inputs are based, is
represented as 1023 A/D (Analog to Digital) Counts.
• This allows for the possibility of a 1024 possible positions when 0 is included in the count.
• The value of the Command Signal with the lever at the Neutral/Idle position is 48 - 50% of the
Reference Voltage or 491 - 511 A/D’s (2.40 - 2.50VDC).
• The Command Signal at Full Ahead is 83 - 85% of the Reference Voltage or 849 - 869 A/D’s (4.15
- 4.25VDC).
• The Command Signal at Full Astern is 12 - 14% of the Reference Voltage or 123 - 143 A/D’s (-.60
- 0.70VDC).

Page B 6-13
B6 TROUBLESHOOTING REMOTE STATIONS

B6-4 Remote Station Select

The second required item for taking command is “Station Select” or depressing of the Transfer Button.
The Transfer Button can be tested by entering the Diagnostic Menu H0.
Figure 11: Display Station A/D’s No Station Transfer Button Depressed
A) Depress the Up or Down (scroll) Push Button
until four zeroes are displayed without decimal
points as shown in Figure 11:.
Figure 12: Example Display Station A/D’s Transfer Button Depressed for B) For Stations 1 - 4 when the Transfer Button is
Stations 1 - 4
depressed, the 0 which represents that remote
station, will change to a 1 as shown in
Figure 12:.

Whenever command cannot be gained at a particular remote station, the Station Select and Command
Signals are the first to be investigated. If either the Command Signal is out of range or the Station Select
is inoperable, command will not be accepted at that remote station

B6-5 Stuck Transfer Button

The Transfer Button is a normally open, momentary switch. The only time the switch should close is
when it is depressed to take command or when entering or departing various other functions. In the event
that the Transfer Button became stuck in the closed position, the following will occur:

• The Transfer Button would have to be closed for 15 seconds or more.

• The throttle and clutch are not affected.
• A solid tone is heard from all remote stations, until the button’s contact opens or transfer to
another remote station has taken place.

If a Control Head that is not in command has a stuck transfer button, the following will happen:

• If Control Head levers are positioned at Neutral/Idle, a solid tone is heard from all remote sta-
tions.
• If Control Head levers are positioned other than Neutral/Idle, a three (3) second tone is heard
from all remote stations.
• Error Code 29 - 32, depending on which remote station, will be shown on the Processor
Display.
• Command can be taken at any other operational remote station.
• After one (1) second command can be regained at the remote station with the stuck button as
long as the problem has been corrected by depressing the transfer button.

If a stuck Transfer Button is suspected, this can be verified by looking at the Station Select status (1 or 0) as
outlined in Section B6-4 - "Remote Station Select".

• An Error Code 29 - 32 will be shown on the Display, depending on which Station is

experiencing the problem.

Page B 6-14
B7 TROUBLESHOOTING ERROR CODES

B7 TROUBLESHOOTING ERROR CODES

As stated previously, if a problem with the Control System is detected, the Processor is programmed to display
numerous Error Codes to aid in the isolation of the cause. The following tables list these Error Codes, along with
a brief description.

Table 2: Solenoid Clutch Error Codes

Error # Title Description

1 Clutch Astern Shorted The Astern Clutch Solenoid is requiring more current than expected.

3 Clutch Neutral Shorted The Neutral Clutch Solenoid is requiring more current than expected.

5 Clutch Ahead Shorted The Ahead Clutch Solenoid is requiring more current than expected.

Table 3: Solenoid Troll Error Codes

Error # Title Description

7 Troll ON/OFF Shorted The Troll ON/OFF Solenoid is requiring more current than expected.

9 Troll Command Shorted The Troll Proportional Solenoid is requiring more current than expected.

10 Troll Command Open The Troll Proportional Solenoid should be drawing current but is not.

Table 4: Basic Error Codes

Error # Title Description

13 Station No.1 Station No.1 Control Head’s lever position is out of range.
Faulted High The input appears to be too high.

14 Station No.2 Station No.2 Control Head’s lever position is out of range.
Faulted High The input appears to be too high.

15 Station No.3 Station No.3 Control Head’s lever position is out of range.
Faulted High The input appears to be too high.

16 Station No.4 Station No.4 Control Head’s lever position is out of range.
Faulted High The input appears to be too high.

17 Station No.5 Station No.5 Control Head’s lever position is out of range.
Faulted High The input appears to be too high.

18 Station No.6 Station No.6 Control Head’s lever position is out of range.
Faulted High The input appears to be too high.

19 Station No.7 Station No.7 Control Head’s lever position is out of range.
Faulted High The input appears to be too high.

20 Station No.8 Station No.8 Control Head’s lever position is out of range.
Faulted High The input appears to be too high.

21 Station No.1 Station No.1 Control Head’s lever position is out of range.
Faulted Low The input appears to be too low.

22 Station No.2 Station No.2 Control Head’s lever position is out of range.
Faulted Low The input appears to be too low.

23 Station No.3 Station No.3 Control Head’s lever position is out of range.
Faulted Low The input appears to be too low.

24 Station No.4 Station No.4 Control Head’s lever position is out of range.
Faulted Low The input appears to be too low.

Page B-15
B7 TROUBLESHOOTING ERROR CODES

25 Station No.5 Station No.5 Control Head’s lever position is out of range.
Faulted Low The input appears to be too low.

26 Station No.6 Station No.6 Control Head’s lever position is out of range.
Faulted Low The input appears to be too low.

27 Station No.7 Station No.7 Control Head’s lever position is out of range.
Faulted Low The input appears to be too low.

28 Station No.8 Station No.8 Control Head’s lever position is out of range.
Faulted Low The input appears to be too low.

29 Station No.1 Station No.1 Control Head’s Transfer Button has either been closed too long or has
Button Stuck Closed been closed since power-up.

30 Station No.2 Station No.2 Control Head’s Transfer Button has either been closed too long or has
Button Stuck Closed been closed since power-up.

31 Station No.3 Station No.3 Control Head’s Transfer Button has either been closed too long or has
Button Stuck Closed been closed since power-up.

32 Station No.4 Station No.4 Control Head’s Transfer Button has either been closed too long or has
Button Stuck Closed been closed since power-up.

33 Station No.5 Station No.5 Control Head’s Transfer Button has either been closed too long or has
Button Stuck Closed been closed since power-up.

34 Station No.6 Station No.6 Control Head’s Transfer Button has either been closed too long or has
Button Stuck Closed been closed since power-up.

35 Station No.7 Station No.7 Control Head’s Transfer Button has either been closed too long or has
Button Stuck Closed been closed since power-up.

36 Station No.8 Station No.8 Control Head’s Transfer Button has either been closed too long or has
Button Stuck Closed been closed since power-up.

37 CAN Communication The Control-Area-Network protocol has detected an error in communication with
Stuffing Error other devices on the network. The error type is a stuffing error.

38 CAN Communication The Control-Area-Network protocol has detected an error in communication with
Form Error other devices on the network. The error type is a form error.

39 CAN Communication The Control-Area-Network protocol has detected an error in communication with
Acknowledge Error other devices on the network. The error type is an acknowledge error.

40 CAN Communication The Control-Area-Network protocol has detected an error in communication with
Bit 1 Error other devices on the network. The error type is a Bit 1 error.

41 CAN Communication The Control-Area-Network protocol has detected an error in communication with
Bit 0 Error other devices on the network. The error type is a Bit 0 error.

42 CAN Communication The Control-Area-Network protocol has detected an error in communication with
CRC Error other devices on the network. The error type is a CRC error.

43 CAN Communication The Control-Area-Network protocol has detected an error in communication with
Bus Error other devices on the network. The error type is a Bus failure error. The error
cannot be recovered from without cycling power to the Processor.

44 Comm. Error Time-out Communication with System has been too long without a Refresh message
System 1

45 Comm. Error Time-out Communication with System has been too long without a Refresh message
System 2

46 Comm. Error Time-out Communication with System has been too long without a Refresh message
System 3

47 Comm. Error Time-out Communication with System has been too long without a Refresh message
System 4

Page B-16
B7 TROUBLESHOOTING ERROR CODES

48 Comm. Error Time-out Communication with System has been too long without a Refresh message
System 5

49 Station Expander Comm. Communication with Station Expander has been too long without a Refresh
Error Time-out System 6 message.

50 Station Expander Comm. Communication with Station Expander has been too long without a Refresh
Error Time-out System 7 message.

51 Station Expander Comm. Communication with Station Expander has been too long without a Refresh
Error Time-out System 8 message.

52 Station Expander Comm. Communication with Station Expander has been too long without a Refresh
Error Time-out System 9 message.

53 Station Expander Comm. Communication with Station Expander has been too long without a Refresh
Error Time-out System 10 message.

54 Over Voltage Fault The applied battery voltage is above the expected limits for greater than two (2)
seconds

55 Under Voltage Fault The applied battery voltage is below the expected limits for greater than two (2)
seconds

56 Reset Due to Software The system has had an unexpected Reset, due to a software problem.
Watchdog

57 Reset Due to Software The system has had an unexpected Reset, due to a softwareproblem.
Fault

58 Reset Due to Hardware The system has had an unexpected Reset, due to a hardware problem.
Watchdog

59 Oscillator Watchdog The system Oscillator has experienced a malfunction.

Page B-17
B8 TROUBLESHOOTING BASIC PROBLEM CAUSES AND SOLUTIONS

B8 TROUBLESHOOTING BASIC PROBLEM CAUSES

AND SOLUTIONS
The following table lists the various Error Codes and provides possible causes and solutions. Error Codes
appearing on the Port side Processor’s Display LED are port side errors and vice versa. The Causes and Solutions
provided are the most likely, but are not the only possible causes for the Errors Codes listed.

Table 5: Solenoid Clutch Problem Causes and Solutions

Error # CAUSE SOLUTION

1 a. The Astern Clutch Solenoid is defective. a. Replace the Astern Clutch Solenoid.

b. The Clutch Harness is incorrectly wired at the b. Properly connect the Clutch Harness to the Astern
Gear Box. Solenoid.

2 a. The Astern Clutch Solenoid circuit is Open. a. Properly connect the Astern Clutch Solenoid.

b. The Astern Clutch Solenoid is defective. b. Replace the Astern Clutch Solenoid.

3 a. The Neutral Solenoid is defective. a. Replace the Neutral Solenoid.

b. The Neutral Solenoid is incorrectly wired at the b. Properly connect the Neutral Solenoid.
Gear Box.

4 a. The Neutral Solenoid circuit is Open. a. Properly connect the Neutral Solenoid.
b. The Neutral Solenoid is defective. b. Replace the Neutral Solenoid.

5 a. The Ahead Clutch Solenoid Circuit is incorrectly a. Properly connect the Ahead Clutch Solenoid.
wired at the Gear Box.

b. The Ahead Clutch Solenoid is defective. b. Replace the Ahead Clutch Solenoid.

6 a. The Ahead Clutch Solenoid Circuit is Open. a. Properly connect the Ahead Clutch Solenoid.

b. The Ahead Clutch Solenoid is defective. b. Replace the Ahead Clutch Solenoid.

Table 6: Solenoid Troll Problem Causes and Solutions

Error # CAUSE SOLUTION

7 a. The Troll On/ Off Solenoid is defective. a. Properly connect the Troll On/ Off Solenoid.
b. The Troll On/ Off Solenoid is incorrectly wired at b. Replace the Troll On/ Off Solenoid.
the Gear Box.

8 a. The Troll On/ Off Solenoid circuit is Open. a. Properly connect the Troll On/ Off Solenoid.
b. The Troll On/ Off Solenoid is defective. b. Replace the Troll On/ Off Solenoid.

9 a. The Troll Command Solenoid is defective. a. Properly connect the Troll Command Solenoid.

b. The Troll Command Solenoid is incorrectly wired b. Replace the Troll Command Solenoid.
at the Gear Box.

10 a. The Troll On/ Off Solenoid circuit is Open. a. Properly connect the Troll On/ Off Solenoid.

b. The Troll On/ Off Solenoid is defective. b. Replace the Troll On/ Off Solenoid.

Table 7: Basic Control System Problem Causes and Solutions

Error # CAUSE SOLUTION

13 a. The Station No.1 Control Head is defective. a. Replace Station No.1 Control Head.
14 a. The Station No.2 Control Head is defective. a. Replace Station No.2 Control Head.

15 a. The Station No.3 Control Head is defective. a. Replace Station No.3 Control Head.

Page B8-18
B8 TROUBLESHOOTING BASIC PROBLEM CAUSES AND SOLUTIONS

16 a. The Station No.4 Control Head is defective. a. Replace Station No.4 Control Head.

17 a. The Station No.5 Control Head is defective. a. Replace Station No.5 Control Head.

18 a. The Station No.6 Control Head is defective. a. Replace Station No.6 Control Head.

19 a. The Station No.7 Control Head is defective. a. Replace Station No.7 Control Head.

20 a. The Station No.8 Control Head is defective. a. Replace Station No.8 Control Head.

21 a. The Station No.1 Control Head is not properly a Properly connect the Station No.1 Control Head.
connected.
b. The Station No.1 Control Head is defective. b Replace Station No.1 Control Head.

22 a. The Station No.2 Control Head is not properly a Properly connect the Station No.2 Control Head.
connected.
b. The Station No.2 Control Head is defective. b Replace Station No.2 Control Head.

23 a. The Station No.3 Control Head is not properly a Properly connect the Station No.3 Control Head.
connected.
b. The Station No.3 Control Head is defective. b Replace Station No.3 Control Head.

24 a. The Station No.4 Control Head is not properly a Properly connect the Station No.4 Control Head.
connected.
b. The Station No.4 Control Head is defective. b Replace Station No.4 Control Head.

25 a. The Station No.5 Control Head is not properly a Properly connect the Station No.5 Control Head.
connected.
b. The Station No.5 Control Head is defective. b Replace Station No.5 Control Head.

26 a. The Station No.6 Control Head is not properly a Properly connect the Station No.6 Control Head.
connected.
b The Station No.6 Control Head is defective. b Replace Station No.6 Control Head.

27 a. The Station No.7 Control Head is not properly a Properly connect the Station No.7 Control Head.
connected.
b. The Station No.7 Control Head is defective. b Replace Station No.7 Control Head.

28 a. The Station No.8 Control Head is not properly a Properly connect the Station No.8 Control Head.
connected.
b. The Station No.8 Control Head is defective. b Replace Station No.8 Control Head.

29 a. The Station No.1 Control Head transfer button is a. Replace the Control Head
defective
b. The Station No.1 Control Head is improperly b. Properly connect Control Head
wired.

30 a. The Station No.2 Control Head transfer button is a. Replace the Control Head
defective
b. The Station No.2 Control Head is improperly b. Properly connect Control Head
wired.

31 a. The Station No.3 Control Head transfer button is a. Replace the Control Head
defective
b. The Station No.3 Control Head is improperly b. Properly connect Control Head
wired.

32 a. The Station No.4 Control Head transfer button is a. Replace the Control Head
defective
b. The Station No.4 Control Head is improperly b. Properly connect Control Head
wired.

33 a. The Station No.5 Control Head transfer button is a. Replace the Control Head
defective
b. The Station No.5 Control Head is improperly b. Properly connect Control Head
wired.
Page B8-19
B8 TROUBLESHOOTING BASIC PROBLEM CAUSES AND SOLUTIONS

34 a. The Station No.6 Control Head transfer button is a. Replace the Control Head
defective
b. The Station No.6 Control Head is improperly b. Properly connect Control Head
wired.

35 a. The Station No.7 Control Head transfer button is a. Replace the Control Head
defective
b. The Station No.7 Control Head is improperly b. Properly connect Control Head
wired.

36 a. The Station No.8 Control Head transfer button is a. Replace the Control Head
defective
b. The Station No.8 Control Head is improperly b. Properly connect Control Head
wired.

37 a. The Serial Harness is in excess of 130 feet a. Reposition the Processor(s) so that the Serial
(40m). Harness is less than 120 feet (37m).
b. The Processor is defective. b. Replace the faulty Processor.
c. The Serial Harness’s shield is not properly c. Ensure that the shield is terminated and the
terminated. termination is at one side only.

38 a. The Serial Harness is in excess of 130 feet a. Reposition the Processor(s) so that the Serial
(40m). Harness is less than 120 feet (37m).
b. The Processor is defective. b. Replace the faulty Processor.
c. c. Ensure that the shield is terminated and the
termination is at one side only.

39 a. The Serial Harness is not connected at one or a. Ensure that the Serial Harness is properly seated at
more Processors. all Processors.
b. The Serial Harness is incorrectly wired. b. Refer to the Serial Plug pin-out in Appendix B.
Correct or replace the Harness.
c. Loss of power to one of the Processorr. c. Restore Power to the Processor.

40 a. The Serial Harness is in excess of 130 feet a. Reposition the Processor(s) so that the Serial
(40m). Harness is less than 120 feet (37m).
b. The Processor is defective. b. Replace the faulty Processor.
c. The Serial Harness’s shield is not properly c. Ensure that the shield is terminated and the
terminated. termination is at one side only.

41 a. The Serial Harness is in excess of 130 feet a. Reposition the Processor(s) so that the Serial
(40m). Harness is less than 120 feet (37m).
b. The Processor is defective. b. Replace the faulty Processor.
c. The Serial Harness’s shield is not properly c. Ensure that the shield is terminated and the
terminated termination is at one side only.

42 a. The Serial Harness is in excess of 130 feet a. Reposition the Processor(s) so that the Serial
(40m). Harness is less than 120 feet (37m).
b. The Processor is defective. b. Replace the faulty Processor.
c. The Serial Harness’s shield is not properly c. Ensure that the shield is terminated and the
terminated. termination is at one side only.

43 a. The Serial Harness is in excess of 130 feet a. Reposition the Processor(s) so that the Serial
(40m). Harness is less than 120 feet (37m).
b. The Processor is defective. b. Replace the faulty Processor.

c. The Serial Harness’s shield is not properly c. Ensure that the shield is terminated and the
terminated. termination is at one side only.

Page B8-20
B8 TROUBLESHOOTING BASIC PROBLEM CAUSES AND SOLUTIONS

44 a. The Serial Harness is not connected at a. Connect the Serial Harness into Processor ID No.1.
Processor ID No.1.
b. None of the Processors has ID No. 1 selected. b. Identify one of the Processors as ID No.1 with the
A0 function.
c. Loss of power to Processor ID No.1. c. Restore power to Processor ID No.1.

45 a. The Serial Harness is not connected at a. Connect the Serial Harness into Processor ID No.2.
Processor ID No.2.
b. None of the Processors has ID No.2 selected. b. Identify one of the Processors as ID No.2 with the
A0 function.
c. Loss of power to Processor ID No.2 c. Restore power to Processor ID No.2.
d. Twin Screw System: One Processor has A1 set d. Set Up A1 to 02 (twin screw) on both Processors.
01 (single screw) selected and the other
Processor has A1 set 02 (twin screw).

46 a. The Serial Harness is not connected at a. Connect the Serial Harness into Processor ID No.3.
Processor ID No.3.
b. None of the Processors has ID No.3 selected. b. Identify one of the Processors as ID No.3 with the
A0 function.
c. Loss of power to Processor ID No.3. c. Restore power to Processor ID No.3.
47 a. The Serial Harness is not connected at a. Connect the Serial Harness into Processor ID No.4.
Processor ID No.4.
b. None of the Processors has ID No.4 selected. b. Identify one of the Processors as ID No.4 with the
A0 function.
c. Loss of power to Processor ID No.4. c. Restore power to Processor ID No.4.

48 a. The Serial Harness is not connected at a. Connect the Serial Harness into Processor ID No.5.
Processor ID No.5.
b. None of the Processors has ID No.5 selected. b. Identify one of the Processors as ID No.5 with the
A0 function.
c. Loss of power to Processor ID No.5. c. Restore power to Processor ID No.5.

49 a. The Station Expander Serial Harness is not a. Connect the Station Expander serial Harness into
connected to ID #6, although it has been ID #6.
selected.
b. If six items had been selected, ID #6 has not b. Identify one item as ID #6 with the A0 Function.
been identified.
c. Loss of power to ID#6. c. Restore power to ID#6.

50 a. The Station Expander Serial Harness is not a. Connect the Station Expander serial Harness into
connected to ID #7, although it has been ID #7.
selected.
b. If six items had been selected, ID #7 has not b. Identify one item as ID #7 with the A0 Function.
been identified.
c. Loss of power to ID#7 c. Restore power to ID#7.

51 a. The Station Expander Serial Harness is not a. Connect the Station Expander serial Harness into
connected to ID #8, although it has been ID #8.
selected.
b. If six items had been selected, ID #8 has not b. Identify one item as ID #8 with the A0 Function.
been identified.
c. Loss of power to ID#8. c. Restore power to ID#8.

Page B8-21
B8 TROUBLESHOOTING BASIC PROBLEM CAUSES AND SOLUTIONS

52 a. The Station Expander Serial Harness is not a. Connect the Station Expander serial Harness into
connected to ID #9, although it has been ID #9.
selected.
b. If six items had been selected, ID #9 has not b. Identify one item as ID #9 with the A0 Function.
been identified.
c. Loss of power to ID#9. c. Restore power to ID#9.

53 a. The Station Expander Serial Harness is not a. Connect the Station Expander serial Harness into
connected to ID #10, although it has been ID #10.
selected.
b. If six items had been selected, ID #10 has not b. Identify one item as ID #10 with the A0 Function.
been identified.
c. Loss of power to ID#10. c. Restore power to ID#10.

54 a. The battery is being overcharged. a. Repair or replace the charging system.

b. There’s a loose terminal on the battery while b. Clean and tighten the battery posts and terminals.
being charged.

55 a. Battery will not take a charge and is defective. a. Replace the battery.
b. The battery is not being properly charged b. Repair or replace the charging system.
c. There’s a high resistance connection between c. Locate and repair the high resistance connection
the battery and the Processor.

56 An unexpected software or hardware reset has Replace the Processor.

occurred.

57 An unexpected software reset has occurred. Replace the Processor.

58 An unexpected software or hardware reset has Replace the Processor.

occurred.

59 External Interference, such as a lightning strike. If the error message is displayed once and you are
able to clear the error, take no further actions at
this time. If the error cannot be cleared, replace
the Processor.

Page B8-22
B9 TROUBLESHOOTING PROBLEMS WITHOUT ERROR CODES

B9 TROUBLESHOOTING PROBLEMS WITHOUT

ERROR CODES
In addition to the Error Codes listed above, some problems may not necessarily generate Error Codes. The
following give some examples where the Processor may not detect a fault, though the operation may not be
perfect:

B9-1 Basic Control System Problems Without

Error Codes

SYMPTOM: CAUSE REMEDY

No audible tones heard at one a. Incorrectly wired Station a. Verify that the black wire is properly
Control Station when power is first Harness/ Cable. connected to pin 1 on the Control Head
applied to the Processor. All other and Pin 8 at the Processor.
features function normally.
b. The Control Head’s Sound b. Measure the AC voltage at pins 1 & 3 of
Transducer is defective. the Control Head. If 20- 25 VAC is
present, replace the Control Head.

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

The Control Head’s red LED a. Incorrectly wired Station a. Verify that the brown wire is properly
doesn’t light when in command, Harness/ Cable. connected to pin 2 on the Control head
but otherwise functions properly and pin 2 at the Processor.

b. The Control Head’s red LED b. Measure the DC voltage at pins 2 & 3 at
or circuit is open. the Control Head. The measurement will
be approximately 2.20 VDC when the red
LED is lit. If 4.00 VDC is measured, the
red LED or its circuit is open. Replace the
Control Head.

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

The engine begins to turn-over a. The voltage available at the a. Supply power to the Processor from a
while starting and then stops. A Processor has dropped too battery other than the starting battery or
slow repetitive tone is heard from low, due to the starter’s supply power from two sources through
all Remote Stations current requirement an APS (Automatic Power Selector).

b. Battery charge is too low b. Recharge/ replace the battery or supply

battery power from two sources through
an APS.

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

When power is turned ON to the a. No power to the Processor. a. Disconnect the Power Harness from the
Processor, there are no tones from Processor. Measure the DC voltage at
any of the Remote Stations, the pins 10 (+) and 11 (-) of the Harness plug.
Control Head red LED does not If 12 or 24 VDC is not present, check the
light when the Transfer Button is circuit breakers, switches and cables
pressed, and the Display is not lit feeding power to the Processor. Correct
at the Processor. the power source as required.

b. The battery’s polarity is b. Disconnect the Power Harness from the

reversed at the Processor. Processor. Connect a voltmeter’s red
lead to pin 10 and the black lead to pin 11
of the Harness’s plug. If negative voltage
is measured, reverse the wires.

c. Defective Processor. c. If Causes a. and b. were not the fault,

replace the Processor.

Page B9-23
B9 TROUBLESHOOTING PROBLEMS WITHOUT ERROR CODES

SYSMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

Active Synchronization is a. There is no Tachometer a. The Tachometer Sensor frequency can be

inoperable. Sensor signal at the Port or seen on the Processor’s Display by
Starboard Processor. accessing the Diagnostic Menu H0. If the
frequency is not measured, check the
Tachometer Sensor and the wiring.

b. Loss of Serial b. If Active Synchronization is inoperative

Communication between due to a lack of Serial Communications,
the Processors. one or more Error Codes will be displayed
indicating the loss of communication.

c. The Processor’s c. All Processors must have a unique

Identification number(s) identification number as set with
have not been set properly. Function Code A0. Refer to Section 5-
SET UP PROCEDURES.

d. The correct number of d. All Processor must have the same

engines has not been set. number of engines selected as
programmed with Function Code A1.
Refer to Section 5- SET UP PROCEDURES.

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

When transferring command from The Control Head Set the correct Throttle Profile with
one Station to another, command Harnesses are plugged into Function Code E0. Refer to Section 5 -
transfers to one side only. No two different Station SET UP PRODCEDURES.Plug the Control
Error Messages are displayed. connectors on a Processor Head Harnesses into the same numbered
with the Software Revision Station connector on the Port and
.0 Starboard Processors

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

When transferring command from a. The Control Head a. Set the correct Throttle Profile with
one Station to another,the transfer Harnesses are plugged into Function Code E0. Refer to Section 5 -
does not take place. The red LED two different Station SET UP PRODCEDURES.
does not light, even temporarily. connectors on a Processor
No Error Messages are displayed. with the Software Revision
.1

b. The Transfer Button is b. Verify a defective Transfer Button by

defective. accessing the H0 Diagnostic Menu.
If the 0 does not change to a 1 while the
Transfer Button is depressed, replace the
Control Head.

Page B9-24
B9 TROUBLESHOOTING PROBLEMS WITHOUT ERROR CODES

B9-2 Solenoid Clutch Problems Without Error

Codes

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

Cannot obtain Warm-up Mode The Processor is sensing Depress the Transfer Button while moving
while moving the Control Head that the Control Head’s the Control Head lever in the Astern
lever in the Ahead direction, only in lever is moving in the Astern direction. If the LED begins to blink, the
the Astern direction. direction Control Head is incorrectly wired. ***
Check the colors of the wires at pins 5
and 7. *** A right hand Control Head
should have yellow at pin 5 and blue at
pin 7. *** A left hand Control Head
should have blue at pin 5 and yellow at
pin 7. *** Ahead and Astern Solenoid
Wires need to be reversed.

B9-3 Electronic Throttle Problems Without Error

Codes

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

The engine RPM’s vary, without a. Problem with the Governor. a. Connect the Break-out Box (p/n 13927) as
moving the Control Head lever shown in the Throttle Testing Section of
(synchronization disabled). the Service Field Test Unit Manual.
If variations are seen, proceed to Step b).
If no variations are seen, contact a
certified engine mechanic.

b. Erratic Command Signal. b. Refer to Command Signal testing in

Section B6 - STATION TRANSFER.
If variations of the A/D counts occur,
connect the Control Head to another
Station (if available) on the Processor. If
variations persist, replace the Control
Head.

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

The engine’s Idle and Full Throttle a. The incorrect Throttle a. Set the correct Throttle Profile with
RPM’s are too high or too low. Profile has been set. Function Code E0. Refer to Section 5 -
SET UP PRODCEDURES.

b. The Idle (Function Code E2 b. Adjust Throttle Minimum E2 and Throttle

Throttle Minimum) and Full Maximum E3 as specified in Section 6 -
Throttle (Function Code E3 DOCK TRIALS.
Throttle Maximum ) are
incorrectly set.

c. The Governor or its Control c. After Causes a. and b. have been

Module is incorrectly eliminated, contact a certified engine
adjusted or faulty. mechanic to properly adjust.

Page B9-25
B10 SYNCHRONIZATION TROUBLESHOOTING

B10 SYNCHRONIZATION TROUBLESHOOTING

If you encounter a problem with Synchronization, it will more than likely one of the following; failure to attempt
to synchronize, synchronizing at different RPM’s or RPM variations of one or both engines while synchronized.
Each problem is distinct and the cause may differ depending on the type of Synch. Therefore, each type is
discussed individually.

B10-1 Equal Throttle Synchronization

B10-1.1 Basic Troubleshooting

SYMPTOM CAUSE SOLUTION

Will not synchronize. a. Synchronization is Disabled a. At the Station-in-Command, move both

Control Head levers to more than 5% of
the speed range. Press and hold the
transfer button for 5 seconds.
If synch is disabled, the green LED will
light as long as the button is pressed.
If synch was enabled, the green LED
would have blinked twice.

b. The Serial Communication b. Plug the Serial Communication Harness

Harness is not plugged into into both Processors.
both Processors.

c. The Port and Starboard c. Plug the Serial Communication Harness

Processors are not set up into both Processors.
for Twin Screw operation.

d. The Port and Starboard d. On the Port Processor, scroll to Function

Processors have the same A0 and enter a Value of 01.
ID number. On the Starboard Processor, scroll to
Function A0 and enter a Value of 02.

B10-2 Active Synchronization

B10-2.1 Basic Troubleshooting

SYMPTOM CAUSE SOLUTION

The green LED is lit solid, though The Tach Sender signal has Scroll to Function Code H0. Go to the
the Engine RPM’s differ by a been lost by one or both Value for the Tach Sender’s input
significant amount. Processors. frequency. If the frequency displayed is
0000, the signal has been lost and the
system diverted to Equal Throttle Synch.
Correct the wiring or replace the Sender.

Page B10-26
B10 SYNCHRONIZATION TROUBLESHOOTING

SYMPTOM CAUSE SOLUTION

Will not synchronize. a. Synchronization is Disabled a. At the Station-in-Command, move both
Control Head levers to more than 5% of
the speed range. Press and hold the
transfer button for 5 seconds.
If synch is disabled, the green LED will
light as long as the button is pressed.
If synch was enabled, the green LED
would have blinked twice.
b. The Serial Communication b. Plug the Serial Communication Harness
Harness is not plugged into into both Processors.
both Processors.
c. The Port and Starboard c. On the Port Processor, scroll to Function
Processors have the same Code A0 and enter a Value of 01.
ID number. On the Starboard Processor, scroll to
Function Code A0 and enter a Value of
02.
d. The Port and Starboard d. Scroll to Function Code A1, on the Port
Processors are not set up and Starboard Processor. Enter a Value of
for twin screw operation 02 into both Processors.

B10-2.2 Electronic Throttle

SYMPTOM CAUSE SOLUTION

The green LED is lit solid, though a. Function Code E7 is set to a. Scroll to Function Codes E2 and E3 on
the Engine RPM’s differ by a 00 and the Throttle both Processors and compare the Values.
significant amount. Minimum and Throttle The Values of E2 and E3 must be the
Maximum Values differ same for both Processors. Adjust as
between the Port and necessary.
Starboard Processors.
b. The engines run at different b. Active Synchronization MUST be Enabled.
RPM’s with the same
throttle command signals.

SYMPTOM CAUSE SOLUTION

One or both of the engines a. A Station-in-Command a. Scroll to the Diagnostic Menu Function
continually changes RPM (hunts). Control Head’s Command Code H0. Go to the appropriate Station
Will not synchronize properly Signal is varying A/D Count’s display. The Value should
not change by more than +/- 1 A/D Count.
If so, check the connections and if good,
replace the Control Head.
b. One or both of the Tach b. Scroll to Function Code H0 on both
Signals isn’t being read, or Processors and display the frequency of
is being read intermittently. the Tach Signal. If variations of the signal
Function Code E7 is set to a are measured, the cause must be
Value of 01 or 03. determined

Page B10-27
B10 SYNCHRONIZATION TROUBLESHOOTING

SYMPTOM CAUSE SOLUTION

Synchronization does not function. a. The Processors think Astern a. Place both the Port and Starboard
The Control Head’s green LED is being commanded when Processor into Warm-up Mode by
does not light. the Control Head lever is pressing the Transfer Button while
positioned to the Ahead moving the Control Head levers to the
Detent. Ahead detent. Both Control Head’s red
LEDs should be blinking. If not, the 7-
conductor’s connections at pins 5 and 7
are reversed.
b. The Serial Communication b. Ensure the Serial Harness’ plugs are fully
Harness is not properly inserted into the Port and Starboard
installed. Processor’s Pigtails.
c. The Processors are not c. Scroll to Function Code A1 on both
programmed for twin screw. Processors and verify that the Value of
both is set to 02.
d. Both Processors are set to d. Scroll to Function Code A0 and verify that
the same ID number. the Port and Starboard Processors have
different ID numbers.
e. Function Code E7 Value is e. Depending on the installation, change the
set to 02. Value of E7 to 00, 01, or 03.
f. Function Code E7 is set to f. Determine why there is no Tach Signal
03 and no Tach Signal is present.
present.

Page B10-28
1 TROUBLESHOOTING WIRE HARNESSES

1 TROUBLESHOOTING WIRE HARNESSES

The following Sections list the various Harnesses manufactured for use with the Processor. These tables are
invaluable when troubleshooting a suspected interface problem or when manufacturing your own Harnesses.

The Wire Harness Plug figures below indicators:

• SOLID BLACK circles wire termination

• MEDIUM GRAY circles variation in terminations (refer to Table for information
• WHITE circles indicate no wire termination.

1-1 Basic Control System Harnesses

Table 8: Power, Start Interlock Harness Pin-Out

Plugs into Processor HARNESS PLUG HARNESS PLUG ENGINE & BATTERY ENGINE & BATTERY
POWER Connector Termination A Conductor Color Termination B Description
Termination A 1 Yellow w/ Starter Solenoid Closed contact when
Red Trace In-Command and at Neutral.
10 Red Battery ( + ) + 24 VDC
11 Black Battery ( - ) - DC Return
12 Yellow w/ Starter Switch Wire at Closed contact when
Red Trace the Starter Solenoid In-Command and at Neutral.

Table 9: Power, Start Interlock , Clutch Pressure Switch Harness Pin-Out

Plugs into Processor HARNESS HARNESS ENGINE/GEAR/BATTERY ENGINE/GEAR/BATTERY

POWER Connector Termination A Conductor Color Termination B Description
Termination A 1 Yellow w/ Starter Solenoid Closed Contact when In-Command
Red Trace and at Neutral
6 Light Blue Clutch Pressure Normally Open contact that closes
Switch when transmission manufacturer’s
minimum safe operating pressure is
reached.
7 Light Blue Clutch Pressure Normally Open contact that closes
Switch when transmission manufacturer’s
minimum safe operating pressure is
reached.
10 Red Battery (+) 24 VDC
11 Black Battery ( - ) - DC Return
12 Yellow w/ Starter Switch Wire Closed contact when In-Command
Red Trace at the Starter Solenoid and at Neutral

Table 10: Power, Start Interlock, Clutch Pressure Switch, and Alarm Harness Pin-Out

Plugs into Processor HARNESS HARNESS ENGINE/GEAR/ALARM/ ENGINE/GEAR/ALARM/BATTERY

POWER Connector Termination A Conductor BATTERY Termination B Description
Termination A 1 Yellow w/ Start Solenoid Closed Contact when In-Command and
Red Trace at Neutral
2 Red External Alarm Normally Open contact opens with fault
Circuit or loss of power.
3 Black External Alarm Normally Open contact opens with fault
Circuit or loss of power
6 Light Blue Clutch Pressure Normally Open contact that closes when
Switch transmission manufacturer’s minimum
safe operating pressure is reached.

Page B11-29
1 TROUBLESHOOTING WIRE HARNESSES

Table 10: Power, Start Interlock, Clutch Pressure Switch, and Alarm Harness Pin-Out

Plugs into Processor HARNESS HARNESS ENGINE/GEAR/ALARM/ ENGINE/GEAR/ALARM/BATTERY

POWER Connector Termination A Conductor BATTERY Termination B Description
7 Light Blue Clutch Pressure Normally Open contact that closes when
Switch transmission manufacturer’s minimum
safe operating pressure is reached.
10 Red Battery (+) + 24 VDC
11 Black Battery ( - ) - DC Return
12 Yellow w/ Starter Switch Wire at Closed contact when In-Command and
Red Trace the Starter Solenoid at Neutral

Table 11: Serial Communication Harness Pin-Out

Plugs into each Processor’s SERIAL HARNESS PLUG HARNESS PLUG HARNESS PLUG HARNESS PLUG
Connector Termination End A Conductor Color Termination End B Description
Termination A Termination B 1 Black 1 CAN Low
2 Red 2 CAN High
6 Yellow/Green N/C N/A

Table 12: Control Head Harness Pin-Out

Plugs into Processor Plugs into Control Head Termination Conductor Termination
STATION Connectors Pigtail Connector A Color B Description
Termination A Termination B 1 Green/Yellow N/C Shield
2 Brown 2 Red LED ( + )
3 Violet 8 (Stbd side only) Green LED ( - )
4 Orange 4 Transfer Button ( + )
5 Red 3 Ground
6 Green 6 Lever Command Signal
7 Blue 5 (left hand) VREF/Reference Voltage
E

7 (right hand)
8 Black 1 Tone ( + )

Table 13: Control Head Harness Hard-Wire

Plugs into Processor Hard-wires to Termination Conductor Termination Description

STATION Connectors Control Head A Color B
Termination A Termination B 1 Green/Yellow N/C Shield
Port 2 Brown 2 Red LED ( + )
3 Violet 8 Green LED ( - )
4 Orange 4 Transfer Button ( + )
5 Red 3 Ground
6 Green 6 Lever Command Signal
Starboard
E

7 Blue 5 (Port); 7 (Stbd) VREF (+5VDC)

8 Black 1 Tone ( + )

NOTE: Starboard Side of Control Head - Jumper Pins 3 to 5;

Port Side of Control Head - Jumper Pins 3 to 7

Page B11-30
1 TROUBLESHOOTING WIRE HARNESSES

Table 14: Tachometer Sensor Harness Pin-Out

Plugs into Processor TACH SENSOR TACH SENSOR

TACH Connector Termination A Conductor Color Termination B Description
Termination A 2 Red Pin B Tachometer ( + )
3 Black Pin C Tachometer ( - )
4 Green/Yellow N/C N/A

B1-1 Clutch Harnesses

Table 15: Power/Ahead/Astern Clutch Harness Pin-Out

Plugs into Processor Termination Conductor GEAR BOX GEAR BOX

CLUTCH Connector A Color Termination B Description
Termination Ay 1 Red + DC Power Source + 24 VDC
2 Black - DC Power Source - VDC Return
3 Red Ahead Solenoid + 24 VDC when Ahead Clutch Selected
4 Black Ahead Solenoid - VDC Return for Ahead Clutch
5 Red Astern Solenoid + 24 VDC when Astern Clutch Selected
6 Black Astern Solenoid - VDC Return for Astern Clutch

Table 16: PowerAhead/Neutral/Astern Clutch Harness Pin-Out

Plugs into Processor Termination Conductor GEAR BOX GEAR BOX

CLUTCH Connector A Color Termination B Description
Termination A 1 Red + DC Power Source + 24 VDC
2 Black - DC Power Source - VDC Return
3 Red Ahead Solenoid + 24 VDC when Ahead Clutch Selected
4 Black Ahead Solenoid - VDC Return for Ahead Clutch
5 Red Astern Solenoid + 24 VDC when Astern Clutch Selected
6 Black Astern Solenoid - VDC Return for Astern Clutch
7 Red Neutral Solenoid +24 VDC at all times
8 Black Neutral Solenoid -VDC Return for Neutral Solenoid

B1-2 Clutch/Troll Harnesses

Table 17: Power/Ahead/Astern Clutch, Troll ON/OFF, and Troll Command Harness Pin-Out

Plugs into Processor Termination Conductor GEAR BOX GEAR BOX

CLUTCH Connector A Color Termination B Description
yTermination A 1 Red + DC Power Source +24 VDC
2 Black - DC Power Source - VDC Return
3 Red Ahead Clutch Solenoid + 24 VDC when Ahead Clutch Selected
4 Black Ahead Clutch Solenoid - VDC Return for Ahead Clutch
5 Red Astern Clutch Solenoid + 24 VDC when Astern Clutch Selected
6 Black Astern Clutch Solenoid - VDC Return for Astern Clutch
9 Red Troll On/Off Solenoid +24 VDC when Troll is selected.
10 Black Troll On/Off Solenoid -VDC Return for Troll On/Off Solenoid
11 Red Troll Command Solenoid 0- 100% Duty Cycle @ 500Hz. for
controlling Proportional Solenoid Valve
12 Black Troll Command Solenoid -VDC Return for Troll Command Solenoid
Page B11-31
1 TROUBLESHOOTING WIRE HARNESSES

B1-3 Throttle Harnesses

Table 18: Current/MAN Throttle Harness Pin-Out

Plugs into the Processor Conductor ENGINE ENGINE

THROTTLE Connector Termination A Color Termination B Description

Termination A 1 Black Engine DC-Bus Throttle Signal Return

3 Red ECM 0.00 - 21.0 mA Throttle Signal

E
8 Green/Yellow N/C N/A

Table 19: Frequency Throttle Harness Pin-Out

Plugs into Processor Conductor ENGINE ENGINE

THROTTLE Connector Termination A Color Termination B Description

Termination A 1 Black Engine DC-Bus Throttle Signal Return

7 Red ECM 120.64 - 463.50 Hz Throttle Signal

E
8 Green/Yellow N/C N/A

Table 20: PWM Throttle Harness Pin-Out

Plugs into Processor Termination Conductor ENGINE ENGINE

THROTTLE Connector A Color Termination B Description

Termination A 1 Black Engine DC-Bus Throttle Signal Return

2 Red ECM PWM Throttle Signal (0 - 100% Duty Cycle @

E 500 Hz)

8 Green/Yellow N/C N/A

Table 21: Voltage Throttle Harness Pin-Out

Plug into Processor Conductor ENGINE ENGINE

THROTTLE Connector Termination A Color Termination B Description

Termination A 1 Black Engine DC-Bus Throttle Signal Return

4 Red ECM 0.00 - 5.00 VDC Throttle Signal

E
8 Green/Yellow N/C N/A

Page B11-32
Service Field Test Unit
Reference Manual
MM13927 Rev.D 10/03
 MM13927 Table of Contents
MM13927 Table of Contents .............................................................................................................TOC-1
Revision List .......................................................................................................................................TOC-2

1 INTRODUCTION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1
Figure 1-1: Service Field Test Unit (Break-out Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Figure 1-2: CruiseCommand Connector Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Figure 1-3: Example of ClearCommand Pigtail Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Table 1-1: Connector/Pigtail Descriptions.............................................................................................1-1

2 PROCEDURE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-1
2-1 Throttle Signal Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-1.1 DC Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Figure 2-4: Throttle Connection (DC Voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-1.2 Current (mA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Figure 2-5: Throttle Connection (Current mA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-1.3 PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) with DC Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Figure 2-6: Throttle Connection (PWM with DC Voltmeter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-1.4 PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) with Duty Cycle Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Figure 2-7: Throttle Connection (PWM with Duty Cycle Meter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-1.5 Frequency (Hz.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Figure 2-8: Throttle Connection (Frequency Hz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-2 CLUTCH TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-2.1 Neutral Solenoid Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Figure 2-9: Clutch Connection (Neutral Solenoid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-2.2 Ahead Solenoid Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Figure 2-10:Clutch Connection (Ahead Solenoid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-2.3 Astern Solenoid Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Figure 2-11:Clutch Connection (Astern Solenoid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-3 TROLL TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-3.1 Troll On/Off Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 2-12:Troll Connection (ON/OFF Solenoid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-3.2 Troll Command (Proportional Solenoid) Testing with Amp Meter . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 2-13:Troll Connection (Proportional Solenoid with Amp Meter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-4 2-SPEED TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-4.1 2nd Gear Disengaged. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Figure 2-14:2-Speed Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-4.2 2nd Gear Enaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

3 Parts List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-1

Table 3-2: Parts List ...............................................................................................................................3-1

MM13927--1
REVISIONS LIST

Revision List

Rev Date Revision Description

A 11/02 Revised Section 1.0 Table 1

B 2/03 Revised manual to current ZF Marine Electronics manual standards.

Revised Section 3.0

C 4/03 Deleted Section 2.1.6

D 10/03 Revising to add 9000 Series and 2-Speed information

PageMM13927--2
 MM13927-1 INTRODUCTION

MM13927-1 INTRODUCTION
Figure 1: Service Field Test Unit (Break-out Box)
Refer to Bulletin 02-008 for Service Field Test
Unit (Part No. 13927) recommendations.
Refer to Figure 1: for an example of the Test
Unit and a Multimeter.
The Service Field Test Unit, hereafter referred
to as the “Break-out Box”, is recommended
for use with all CruiseCommand Processors
(Part No. 785CE) and with ClearCommand
Processors (Part No. 9XXX Series) that have
pluggable (Pigtail) Throttle, Clutch or Troll
Connections.
The procedures for testing the various outputs of the ClearCommand and CruiseCommand Processors are
similar, with the exception of where they connect to the respective Processor. Figure 2: indicates the location of
the connectors on the CruiseCommand Processor and Figure 3: the typical pigtail plugs on a 9000 Series
ClearCommand Processor.

NOTE: Not all ClearCommand Processors have all of the pigtails shown in Figure 3. Only the pigtails that are
required for a specific application are installed in a ClearCommand Processor.

Figure 2: CruiseCommand Connector Locations Figure 3: Example of ClearCommand Pigtail Locations

6
11339-Example
1
3
Table 1:

Designation # Description Harness Type Harness Use

1 Black 8 Pin Throttle Connector/ The throttle signal is output from this connector/pigtail. The
Pigtail signal may be in the form of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM),
Voltage, Current, or Frequency

2 Black 12 Pin Power Connector/Pigtail This connector/pigtail contains the inputs and outputs for
Main Processor Power, Start Interlock, Clutch Oil Pressure
Interlock, and External Alarm Circuit.

3 Gray 12 Pin Clutch Connector/ The external connections for Clutch Power, Ahead, Astern,
Pigtail and Neutral Solenoids, Troll On/ Off, and Proportional
Solenoids are made at this connector/pigtail.

4 Gray 8 Pin Control Head Connector All the required connections for the Remote Control Stations
are made at these connectors.

5 Gray 6 Pin Serial Communication The Serial Communication connections between multiple
Connector/Pigtail Processors in applications with more than one Processor at
this connector/pigtail

6 Gray 4 Pin Tachometer Sensor The input signal from a Tachometer or Shaft Speed Sensor
Connector/Pigtail connects to this connector/pigtail.

Page MM13927-1-1
MM13927-2 PROCEDURE

MM13927-2 PROCEDURE
The actual procedures for using the Break-out Box are the same for CruiseCommand and ClearCommand
Processors. However, the adjustment within the Processor to obtain the correct output may differ. The
appropriate Installation Manual must be referred to when making the adjustments.

MM13927-2-1 Throttle Signal Testing

Depending on which Processor is being tested, it may have the capability of sourcing one or all of the
following: DC Voltage, Current, PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) or Frequency.
NOTE: The following procedures and drawings pertain to both the CruiseCommand and ClearCommand
Processors.

MM13927-2-1.1 DC Voltage
A) Ensure that power is removed from the Engine Electronics and the Processor.
Figure 4: Throttle Connection (DC Voltage) B) Disconnect the Throttle Harness from the number 1
Processor connector/pigtail.
C) Insert the Break-out Box between the number 1
Processor connector/pigtail and the Throttle Harness as
shown in Figure 4:.
D) Set up the Multimeter to measure DC Volts and plug the
black lead into the Break-out Box black socket labeled “-”
and the red lead into the socket labeled “VDC”.
E) Turn power ‘On’ to the Processor and take command at
any Remote Station.
F) The appropriate Idle Voltage for the application should
be measured at this time.
G) Move the Control Head lever to the Full Throttle position while depressing the Transfer Button
(Throttle Only Mode).
H) The appropriate Full Throttle Voltage for the application should be measured at this time.
MM13927-2-1.2 Current (mA)
A) Ensure power is removed from both the Engine Electronics and the Processor.
B) Disconnect the Throttle Harness from the number 1 Processor connector/pigtail.
C) Insert the Break-out Box between the number 1 Processor connector/pigtail and the Throttle
Harness as shown in Figure 5:.
Figure 5: Throttle Connection (Current mA) D) Set up the Multimeter to measure current (mA.) and
plug the black lead into the Break-out Box black socket
labeled “-“ and the red lead into the socket labeled
“mA”.
E) Turn power ‘On’ to the Processor and take command at
any Remote Station.
F) Depress and hold the Push-button Switch labeled “mA.”
The appropriate Current (mA.) for the application
should be measured.
G) Move the Control Head lever to the Full Throttle
position while depressing the Transfer Button (Throttle
Only Mode).
H) Depress and hold the “mA.” Push-button. The appropriate Full Throttle Current (mA.) for the
application should be measured at this time.
MM13927-2-1.3 PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) with DC Voltmeter
A) Ensure power is removed from both the Engine Electronics and the Processor.
B) Disconnect the Throttle Harness from the number 1 Processor connector/pigtail.

Page MM13927-2-2
 MM13927-2 PROCEDURE

C) Insert the Break-out Box between the number 1 Processor connector/pigtail and the
Throttle Harness as shown in Figure 6: labeled “-“ and the red lead into the socket labeled
“PWM”.
Figure 6: Throttle Connection (PWM with DC Voltmeter
D) Turn power ‘On’ to the Caterpillar ECM (Electronic
Control Module) Only. Do Not apply power to the
Processor at this time.
E) Depending on the type of Caterpillar ECM (PEEC or
ADEMS), the measurement should be approximately 5.00
or 12.00 VDC. Record the measurement as shown in
Drawing Figure 6:.
F) Set up the Multimeter to DC Volts and plug the black lead
into the Break-out Box black socket Turn power ‘On’ to
the Processor and take command at any Remote Station.
G) Record the DC Voltage at this time. The measurement should be 7- 9% of the voltage measured
in step F).
H) Move the Control Head lever to the Full Throttle position while depressing the Transfer Button
(Throttle Only Mode).
I) The measurement should be 91- 93% of the voltage measured in step F) [e.g. Idle = 8% of 12
VDC reference or 0.96 VDC; Full Throttle = 92% of 12 VDC reference or 11.04 VDC.
MM13927-2-1.4 PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) with Duty Cycle Meter
A) Ensure power is removed from both the Engine electronics and the Processor.
Figure 7: Throttle connection (PWM with Duty Cycle Meter)
B) Disconnect the Throttle Harness from the number 1
Processor connector/pigtail.
C) Insert the Break-out Box between the number 1
Processor connector/pigtail and the Throttle Harness
as shown in Figure 7:
D) Set up the Multimeter to measure Duty Cycle and
plug the black lead into the Break-out Box black
socket labeled “-“ and the red lead into the socket
labeled “PWM”.
E) Turn power ‘On’ to the Caterpillar ECM (Electronic
Control Module) and to the Processor.
F) The measurement should be approximately 8% duty Cycle.
G) Move the Control Head lever to the Full Throttle position while depressing the Transfer Button
(Throttle Only Mode).
H) The measurement will increase from 8% to 91- 93%.
MM13927-2-1.5 Frequency (Hz.)
Figure 8: Throttle Connection (Frequency Hz) A) Ensure power is removed from both the Engine Electronics
and the Processor.
B) Disconnect the Throttle Harness from the number 1
Processor connector/pigtail.
C) Insert the Break-out Box between the number 1 Processor
connector/pigtail and the Throttle Harness as shown in
Figure 8:
D) Set up the Multimeter to measure Frequency and plug the
black lead into the Break-out Box black socket labeled “-“ and
the red lead into the socket labeled “FREQ”.
E)
F) Turn power ‘On’ to the Processor and take command at any Remote Station.
G) The appropriate Idle Frequency for the application should be measured at this time.
H) Move the Control Head lever to the Full Throttle position while depressing the Transfer Button
(Throttle Only Mode).
I) The appropriate Full Throttle Frequency for the application should be measured at this time.
Page MM13927-2-3
MM13927-3 CLUTCH PROCEDURE

MM13927-3 CLUTCH PROCEDURE

MM13927-3-1 TESTING
MM13927-3-1.1 Neutral Solenoid Testing
A) Ensure power is removed from both the Processor and the Clutch Power Supply.
Figure 9: Clutch Connections Neutral Solenoid
B) Disconnect the Clutch Harness from the number 3
Processor connector/pigtail.
C) Insert the Break-out Box between the number 3
Processor connector/pigtail and the Clutch Harness as
shown in Figure 9:.
D) Turn power ‘On’ to the Processor and take command at
any Remote Station with the Control Head lever in the
Neutral/Idle position.
E) The measurement on the Neutral Test Point should be
12 or 24 VDC, depending on the Solenoid’s rating and
the LED adjacent to the socket should be illuminated.
F) Move the Control Head lever to the Ahead Detent position. The voltage should drop to 0 VDC
in CruiseCommand systems and remain at 12 or 24 VDC in ClearCommand systems. The
adjacent LED should go out in CruiseCommand systems and stay on in ClearCommand
systems.
MM13927-3-1.2 Ahead Solenoid Testing
A) Ensure power is removed from both the Processor and the Clutch Power Supply.
B) Disconnect the Clutch Harness from the number 3 Processor connector/pigtail.
Figure 10: Clutch Connections Ahead Solenoid C) Insert the Break-out Box between the number 3
Processor connector/pigtail and the Clutch Harness as
shown in Figure 10:.
D) Set up the Multimeter to measure DC Volts and plug
the black lead into the Break-out Box socket labeled
“CLUTCH -“ and the red lead into the socket labeled
“AHEAD”.
E) Turn power ‘On’ to the Processor and take command
at any Remote Station with the lever in the Neutral/
Idle position.
F) The measurement should be 0 VDC and the adjacent
LED should not be lit.
G) Position the Control Head lever into the Ahead detent. The measurement should be 12 or 24
VDC depending on the Ahead Solenoid’s rating. The LED adjacent to the Ahead plug on the
Break-out Box should be lit.
H) Return the Control Head lever to the Neutral/Idle position.
MM13927-3-1.3 Astern Solenoid Testing
A) Ensure power is removed from both the Processor and the Clutch Supply Power.
Figure 11: Clutch Connections Astern Solenoid B) Disconnect the Clutch Harness from the number 3
Processor connector/pigtail.
C) Insert the Break-out Box between the number 3 Processor
connector/pigtail and the Clutch Harness as shown in
Figure 10:.
D) Set up the Multimeter to measure DC Volts and plug the
black lead into the Break-out Box socket labeled “CLUTCH -
“ and the red lead into the socket labeled “ASTERN”.
E) Turn power ‘On’ to the Processor and take command at any
Remote Station with the Control Head lever in the Neutral/
Idle position.
F) The measurement should be 0 VDC and the adjacent LED should not be lit.
G) Position the Control Head lever into the Astern detent. The measurement should be 12 or 24
VDC depending on the Astern Solenoid’s rating. The LED adjacent to the Astern plug on the
Break-out Box should be lit. Return the Control Head lever to the Neutral/Idle position.
Page MM13927-3-4
MM13927-4 TROLL PROCEDURES

MM13927-4 TROLL PROCEDURES

MM13927-4-2 TESTING
MM13927-4-2.1 Troll On/Off Solenoid
A) Ensure power is removed from both the Processor and the Clutch Power Supply.
B) Disconnect the Clutch Harness from the number 3 Processor connector/pigtail.
Figure 12: Troll Connections Troll On/off Solenoid C) Insert the Break-out Box between the number 3 Processor
connector/pigtail and the Clutch Harness as shown in
Figure 12:.
D) Set up the Multimeter to measure DC Volts and connect
the black lead to the socket labeled “CLUTCH –“ and the
red lead to the socket labeled “TROLL ON/OFF” as shown
in Figure 12:.
E) Turn power ‘On’ to the Processor and the Clutch Power
Supply and take command at a Remote Station with the
Control Head lever in the Neutral/Idle position.
F) Depress the Transfer Button again for approximately 2 seconds until the red LED begins
blinking at a fast rate (Troll Mode Indication).
G) The measurement should be 0 VDC.
H) Position the Control Head lever to the Ahead detent. The measurement should now be 12 or 24
VDC, depending on the Solenoid’s rating.
I) Position the Control Head lever further forward while monitoring the DC Voltmeter. The
measurement should go from 12 or 24 VDC to 0 VDC at the same time the red LED on the
Control Head becomes lit solid.
MM13927-4-2.2 Troll Command (Proportional Solenoid) Testing with Amp Meter
A) Ensure power is removed from both the Processor and the Clutch Power Supply.
B) Disconnect the Clutch Harness from the number 3 Processor connector/pigtail.
Figure 13: Troll Connections (Proportional Solenoid)
C) Insert the Break-out Box between the number 3
Processor connector/pigtail and the Clutch Harness as
shown in Figure 13:.
D) Set up the Multimeter to measure (mA.) and connect the
black lead to black socket and the red lead to the red
socket labeled “TROLL COMMAND” as shown in
Figure 13:.
E) Turn power ‘On’ to the Processor and the Clutch Power
Supply and take command at a Remote Station with the
Control Head lever in the Neutral/Idle position.
F) Depress the Transfer Button again for approximately 2 seconds until the red LED on the
Control Head begins blinking at a fast rate (Troll Mode Indication).
G) Flip switch away from "Troll Command" to read current through meter.
H) Move the Control Head lever to the Ahead detent. The current measurement should be the
correct value for minimum clutch pressure (shaft rotations). This value varies depending on
the type of Marine Gear. Refer to the Literature provided with the Trolling Valve and the
Processor for specifics.
I) Slowly advance the Control Head lever while monitoring the current. The current should
increase or decrease, depending on the Gear type, in proportion with the Control Head lever
movement. Once again, refer to the Literature provided with the Trolling Valve and the
Processor for specific values.
J) Continue to move the Control Head lever forward until the red LED stops blinking (lit steady).
The current should drop to 0 mA.

Page MM13927-4-5
MM13927-5 2-SPEED TESTING

MM13927-5 2-SPEED TESTING

MM13927-5-3 2nd Gear Disengaged
A) Ensure power is removed from the Processor.
B) Disconnect the Clutch/2-Speed Harness from the number 3 Processor connector/pigtail.
C) Insert the Break-out Box between the number 3 Processor connector/pigtail and the Clutch/2-Speed
Harness as shown in Figure 14:.

Figure 14: 2-Speed Connections

D) Set up the Multimeter to measure DC Volts and connect the black lead to the socket labeled "CLUTCH
- " and the red lead to the socket labeled "TROLL ON/OFF" as shown in Figure 14:.
E) Turn power ‘On’ to the Processor and take command at any Remote Station.
F) The voltage measurement should be approximate 0 VDC.

MM13927-5-4 2nd Gear Enaged

A) Leave the Break-out Box and Multimeter in the same position as left in Section MM13927-5-3.
B) Start the engine(s).
C) Depress the Transfer Button while moving the lever(s) into the Ahead detent (red LED should be
blinking, indicating Warm-up Mode).
D) Continue to move both Control Head lever(s) forward until the RPM programmed for Function Code
U1 has been reached.
E) The voltage measurement at the Multimeter should now be 12 or 24 VDC, depending on the
Solenoid’s rating.
F) Return the Control Head levers to the Neutral/Idle position and shut down the engines.
G) Turn power Off to the Processor(s).
H) Unplug the Break-out Box from the Pigtail and Harness plugs and reconnect the Harness to the Pigtail.

Page MM13927-5-6
MM13927-6 PARTS LIST

MM13927-6 PARTS LIST

ZF Marine Electronics Part No. Part Name

13927 Service Field Test unit (Break-out Box)

MM13927 Technical Manual

Multimeter

14000 Test Control Head - Dual

Page MM13927-6-7
 ZF Marine Electronics, LLC
12125 Harbour Reach Drive
Mukilteo, WA 98275 USA
800-546-5455 / 425-583-1900
Fax: 425-493-1569

MMC-123 Rev A 2-08

FACTORY AUTHORIZED SALES & SERVICE - NORTH AMERICA

USA
ALABAMA FLORIDA (cont.)

808 Chuck Moorhead, Mike Ellis 3353 Jim Monroe

Gulf Coast Air & Hydraulics T: 251-666-6683 Yacht Equipment & Parts T: 954-463-7222
(mail) PO Box 161134 F: 251-666-6684 3330 SW 3rd Ave. 800-349-9224
Mobile, AL 36616 Ft Lauderdale, FL 33315 F: 954-463-9099
(shipping) 3415 Halls Mills Road [email protected]
Mobile, AL 33693 [email protected]
6427 A.J. Halavacs
CALIFORNIA ZF Marine - Headquarters T: 954-581-4040
3131 SW 42nd Street F: 954-581-4078
2462 Terry Brown Ft Lauderdale, FL 33312
TDC Equipment T: 714-373-8099 [email protected]
15886 Manufacturer Lane F: 714-898-1996 www.zf-marine.com
Huntington Beach, CA 92649
[email protected] ZF Marine - Merritt Island
www.tdcequipment.com 3710 North Courtney Pkwy T: 321-449-0995
Suite 102
7661 Henry Bramhall Merritt Island, FL 32953
Trans Pacific Distributors T: 707-426-6670
1941 Walters Court F: 707-898-1996 LOUISIANA
Fairfield, CA 94533 [email protected]
80 Steve Garver, Richard McConnell
FLORIDA Donovan Marine, Inc. T: 504-488-5731
6316 Humphreys Street 800-347-4464
6265 Ed Rafaniello Harahan, LA 70123 F: 504-443-0504
Control Masters T: 904-260-9756
11623 Columbia Park Drive F: 904-260-9727 6952 Mike Gauthreaux, Laura Heckler
Jacksonville, FL 32258 ZFI Marine - Gulf Coast T: 504-443-0501
www.controlmastersinc.com 161 James Drive West F: 504-443-0504
Suite 120
3338 Steve Baum St Rose, LA 70087 www.zf-marine.com
D.S. Hull Company, Inc. T: 954-463-4307
3320 SW Third Ave. F: 954-527-4173 MARYLAND
Ft Lauderdale, FL 32258
Jeff Carter
2055 John Fox, Andy Glen ZFI- Marine - Annapolis T: 410-604-3320
H & H Marine Sales & Service T: 727-576-0923 345 Log Canoe Circle T: 410-604-3385
10220 San Martin Blvd. N. F: 727-576-9727 Stevensville, MD 21666 F: 410-604-3391
St Petersburg, FL 33702 [email protected]
www.zf-marine.com
 MICHIGAN

3104 Randy Hall, John Dillon- VIRGINIA

Marysville Marine North T: 810-364-7653
1551 Michigan Ave. 800-367-0987 2164 Tim Walters
Marysville, MI 48040 F: 810-364-4112 Engines 1 T: 757-673-7200
www.marysvillemarine.com (mail) PO Box 7788 800-548-6252
Portsmouth, VA 23707 F: 757-673-7211
(shipping) 3504 Shipwright Street
NORTH CAROLINA Portsmouth, VA 23707
[email protected]
Catherine Deegan www.engines1.com
ZFI Marine - North Carolina
1350 Sensation Way T: 252-504-3700
Beaufort, NC 28516 F: 252-504-3773 WASHINGTON
[email protected]
www.zf-marine.com 2004 Mike Gibbons
Fisheries Supply Co. T: 206-632-4462
1900 N. Northlake Way 800-426-6930
NEW JERSEY Seattle, WA 98103 F: 206-634-4600
[email protected]
5272 Bernie Keppel www.fisheriessupply.com
Airline Hydraulics Corp. T: 609-624-3700
428 Woodland-Ocean View Rd. F: 909-624-0863 1256 Bill Mol
Ocean View, NJ 08230 [email protected] PPC - Systems, Inc. T: 360-336-9698
www.airlinehyd.com 12147 Bayhill Road F: 360-757-8747
Burlington, WA 98233 Mobile: 206-915-0712

RHODE ISLAND 6957 Bud Bloom, Kevin Zwicker

12125 Harbour Reach Drive T: 425-583-1900
ZF Marine - Rhode Island T: 401-541-9014 Mukilteo, WA 98275 F: 425-493-1579
1 Mastead Drive F: 401-541-7223 [email protected]
Warwick, RI 02886 [email protected]
www.zf-marine.com www.zf-marine.com

TENNESSEE WISCONSIN

3070 Dan Henry 5804 Brian Hunter

Marysville Marine South T: 615-851-9456 Marysville Marine South T: 608-825-3875
127 Industrial Drive F: 615-851-9465 405 S. Thompson Road 800-992-3878
White House, TN 37188 Sun Prairies, WI 53590 F: 608-825-2790
www.marysvillemarine.com www.marysvillemarine.com

TEXAS

80 Trey Grant
Donovan Marine, Inc. T: 713-734-4171
4757 South Loop East 800-669-8392
Houston, TX 77033 F: 713-734-1674
[email protected]
 CANADA

EASTERN CANADA WESTERN CANADA

Mark Newcomb - Commercial/Recreational 2061 Bill Falk, Alan Stovell

CMC Electronics T: 902-468-8480 Western Marine T: 604-253-7721
40 Thornhill Drive, Unit 6 F: 902-468-8484 1494 Powell Street 800-663-0600
Dartsmouth, Nova Scotia Vancouover, British Columbia F: 604-253-2656
Canada B3B 1S1 Canada V5L 5B5
[email protected] [email protected]

Brian Sibley - Commercial Jeff Bailey - Recreational

CMC Electronics T: 902-742-3423 CMC Electronics T: 604-435-1455
59 Hawthorn F: 902-742-5593 3839 Still Creek Ave. F: 604-435-2231
PO Box 5 Burnaby, British Columbia
zyarmouth, Nova Scotia Canada V5C 4E2
Canada B5A 1N1 [email protected]
[email protected]
Brad Funk - Commercial / Recreational
Bill Taafe - Commercial Jim Goodfellow - Commercial
Dave Duff - Commercial / Recreational CMC Electronics T: 250-544-1561
CMC Electronics T: 709-726-2422 6680 Mirah Road F: 250-544-2061
29 Hallett Cresent F: 709-726-2428 Saanichton, British Columbia
St. John’s Newfoundland Canada V8M 1Z4
Canada A1B 3T2 [email protected]
[email protected] [email protected]
[email protected]

CENTRAL CANADA

Paul Noack, Roy Shipley

CMC Electronics T: 905-607-4262
3600 B Laird Road, Unit 12 F: 905-607-1576
Mississauga, Ontario
Canada L5L 6A7
[email protected]
[email protected]

Micheal Roy
CMC Electronics T: 418-562-6637
566 Duphare Street East F: 418-562-5335
Mantane, Quebec
Canada G4W 3P6
[email protected]

Walter Timmerman
CMC Electronics T:514-748-3000
600 Dr Fredrik Phillips Blvd. F: 514-748-3006
Ville St Laurent, Quebec
Canada H4M 2S9
[email protected]
 ZF Marine Electronics, LLC
12125 Harbour Reach Drive
Mukilteo, WA 98275 USA
800-546-5455 / 425-583-1900
Fax: 425-493-1569

MMC-172 Rev A 2-08

FACTORY AUTHORIZED SALES & SERVICE - INTERNATIONAL

ARGENTINA CHILI

325 Carlos Dorian Freidlander Christian Rogers Nickelmann

Trimer S. A. T: 54-11-4580-0444 Equipamiento Marino Ltda T: (56-2) 4158737
(mail) PO Box 772 F: 54-11-4580-0440 Rafael Correa 1268 Vitacura
Attn: Mariano Castroverde Santiago, Chili F: (56-2) 9-9975059
1000 Buenos Aires, Argentina [email protected]
(shipping) Fray J.S.M. de Oro 2030-40
1425 Buenos Aires,Argentina
CHINA
Pleasure Craft [email protected]
CO0102 Paul Chow
Ing. Daniel Canoura Foilborne Engineering, Ltd. T:852-2687-
2988
Transmisiones Marinas S.A. Unit A 7-9, 13/F Veristrong F:852-2687-1996
Hernandarias 3656 Tele/Fax:(54-223) 4807174 34-36 Au Pui Wan Street / FO-Tan,
B7602GNH Mar Del Plata Shatin, N.T.
Argentina Hong Hong, China
[email protected] [email protected]
Commercial Craft www.tmgroup.com
5224 Anthony Yuen
Renford Marine Equipment (China) Ltd.
AUSTRALIA 501 Laws Commercial Plaza T:852-27427111
788 Cheung Sha Wan Road F:852-27427171
6948 Gary Bain Hong Kong, China
ZF Australia Pty, Ltd. T: 61-(0)2-9679-5555 [email protected]
(mail) Locked Bag 6305
Blacktown BC NSW 2148 F: 61-(0)2-9679-5500 5224 Anthony Yuen
Australia Renford Marine Equipment (Shanghai) Ltd.
(shipping) 14 Lidco Street 811 Jiaxing Building T:8621-50589000
Arndell Park, NSW 2148 877 Dong Fang Road, Pudong
Australia [email protected] Shanghai, China F:8621-505880007
[email protected]

BRAZIL 6953 Tang Zhou Qing, Gong Lan

ZF Shanghai Rep. Office T: 0086-21-6301-4338
7000 Richard Bergamini Room 254, Jiangnan Building
ZF do Brazil S.A. T: 5515-235-2301 No. 600 Luban Road F: 0086-21-6301-6449
Avenida Conda Zepplin, 1935 F: 5515-235-2233 Shanghai, 200023, PR
CEP 18103-0000 Sorocaba China [email protected]
Brazil [email protected] www.zf-marine.com
www.zf-marine.com
 DENMARK GREECE

7257 Michael Johansson, Frank Kiessling 2386 Demetris Kyriazis

ZF Danmark APS T: 45-7022-6243 Amaltheia Marine, Ltd. T:30210-25-88-985
Taastrupgaardsvej 8-10 F: 45-7022-2643 13 Papaflessa Str. F:30210-25-89-986
Taastrup, DK-2630 143 43 N. Halkidona
Denmark [email protected] Athens, Greece [email protected]
[email protected]
www.zf-marine.com ICELAND

ECUADOR CO0133 Gudmundur Bragasson

Maras ehf T: 354-555-6444
Pedro Aspiazu Akralind 2 F: 354-565-7230
ZF Marine’s Consulting T: (593-4) 238-9306 201 Kopavogur
Urdesa Central 1A #13184 Costanera Iceland [email protected]
Guaaquil - Guayas, F: (593-4) 238-4010
Ecuador IRELAND
[email protected]
7326 Adi License
FINLAND ZF Great Britain, Ltd. T: 44-115-986-9211
AbbeyfieldRoad, Lenton F: 44-115-986-9261
7487 Antti Hiidenheimo Nottingham, United Kingdom
Atoy Oy T:35-8968271 NG7 2SX, England [email protected]
PO Box 137 F: 35-8966827305 www.zf-marine.com
FIN-00101, Helsinki
Finland [email protected] ITALY

FRANCE 7093 Antonio Renzetti, AlessandroBusetto

SAIM SPA T: 39-02-488-53206
2190 Laurent Gautier Via Donizetti, 9/11 F: 39-02-48825450
Seimi T: 33-2-98-46-11-02 20090 Assago (MI)
(mail) B.P. 30307 F: 33-2-98-46-11-02 Italy antonio,[email protected]
Toulon Cedex 9, France [email protected]
(shipping) Z.I. Toulon-Est www.saim-group.com
Toulon Cedex 9, France
[email protected] JAPAN
www.vidalmarine.com
7253 Y. Ikeda, Nobora Kasajima
GERMANY ZF Marine Japan Co. Ltd T: 81-03-5808-
4521
7636 Mathias Pien Fujikoshi Bldg. 1-10-11 Iriya Taito-ku
Otto Peining GMBH T: 49-4124-916812 Tokyo, 110-0013 F: 81-03-5808-4531
AM Altendeich 83 F: 49-171-4853376 Japan
D25348 Glukstadt
Germany [email protected] KOREA
www.piening-propeller.de
1415 M.G. Song
Se Jung Engineering Co. T: 82-51-415-0591
#35-4 Namhangdong-1KA F: 82-51-412-6361
Yeongdogu
Pusan, Korea [email protected]
 THE NETHERLANDS (HOLLAND) SINGAPORE

7252 Ton Hekman, Rob van der Linde 157 Steven Wee
ADS/van Stigt T:31-0-183-650001 Mammoth Enterprises Pte, Ltd.
Avelingen F: 31-0-183-650001 (mail) PO Box 283 T: 65-6-44-88266
NL-422 MS Gorinchem Siglap Post Office F: 65-6-44-89800
The Netherlands [email protected] Singapore 914503
(shipping) 6-A Waringin Park
NEW ZEALAND Singapore 416320

6948 Gary Bain 7045 Sharon Ho

ZF Australia Pty, Ltd. T: 61-(0)2-9679-5555 ZF South East Asia T:6861-0177
(mail) Locked Bag 6305 11, Tuas Drive 1 F:6861-9173
Blacktown BC NSW 2148 F: 61-(0)2-9679-5500 Singapore sharon.ho@zf-seasia
Australia
(shipping) 14 Lidco Street SOUTH AFRICA
Arndell Park, NSW 2148
Australia [email protected] 7261 Heather Hermann
ZF South Africa Pty, Ltd T: 27-11-453-1818
NORWAY (mail) PO Box 2098 F: 27-11-453-7506
Kempton Park, 1620 South
7029 Bjorn Reiersen Africa
KGK Norge AS T: 47-22-884-680 (shipping) C/O Barlows Power Systems
Casper Storms Vei 19 F: 47-22-720-902 Cnr Peter Barlow and Kasselss Vlei Rd
Norway bjorn,[email protected]
SPAIN
PERU
5556 Maria Valladolid
7000 Pedro Gonzalez - Orbegoso ZF Espana S.A. T: 34-91-4852-699
PGO Internatinal S.A.C. T: (51-1) 421-6055 Avda. Fuentermar F: 34-91-6733931
AV.Arequipa 2450 of 1108 F: (51-1) 421-6664 Coslada (Madrid) 28820
Lima 14, Peru [email protected] Spain [email protected]
www.zf-marine.com
RUSSIA
SWEDEN
7313 Anastassia Selverstova
ZF Transmissia 000 T: 812-324-54-72 7234 Karl-Henry-Pragsten
Suite 313 F: 7-812-140-18-15 KGK Knutsson AB T: 46-08-923-312
71, Marata Street Tansmissons Divisionen F: 46-08-929-599
St Petersburg Hammarbracken 8,
Russia 191119 [email protected] S-191 81 Sollentuna
Sweden [email protected]
SCOTLAND www.kgk.se

7326 Adi License

ZF Great Britain, Ltd. T: 44-115-986-9211
AbbeyfieldRoad, Lenton F: 44-115-986-9261
Nottingham, United Kingdom
NG7 2SX, England [email protected]
www.zf-marine.com
 SWITZERLAND UNITED KINGDOM (ENGLAND)

CO0111 Fabian Kramer 6932 Peter Middleton, Paul Lakey

Marine Parts Technic T: 41-1997-4090 Atlantis Marine Power, Ltd. T: 44-1752-208810
Pfaffikerstrasse F: 41-1997-4094 Western Wood Way F: 44-1752-208811
CH-8604 Volketswil, Language Science Park
Zurich, Switzerland Plymouth, Devon, PL7 5BG
[email protected] England [email protected]
[email protected] [email protected]
www.marineparts.ch www.atlantismarine.com

TAIWAN
USA
5355 Mike Ou
Asia Diesel Electric Corp. T: 886-7-333-1191 6427 A.J. Halavacs
20th Floor F: 886-7-334-6808 ZF Marine - US Headquarters T: 954-581-4040
34 Min Chuan 1st Road 3131 SW 42nd Street F: 954-581-4078
Kaohsuing, R.O.C. Taiwan Ft Lauderdale, FL 33312
[email protected] [email protected]
www.zf-marine.com
THAILAND
VENEZUELA
7283 Reungpoj V
ZF Thailand Co. Ltd T: 66-2-521-6520 Sistemas de Propulsion C.A.
159/33 Soi Vipawasee F: 66-2-521-6523 AV 67a Entre Calles 149By 150
Laksi, Bangkok 10210 Municipio San Francisco T: 58-261-736-0747
Thailand [email protected] Estado Zulia, Maracaibo, F: 58-261-736-0746
Venzuela [email protected]
TURKEY

7223 Georg Weinstabl

Niveko Makina Dis Ticaret kollektiff Sti
Lorenz severin Moritz Weinstable ve
Ortaklan T:90-212287-27-80
Hasan Yelman cad No. 15, F:90-212-287-65-71
TR-34957 Tuzla - Instanbul Deri
Serbest Bolgesi, Turkey [email protected]

U.A.E.

7030 M. Narasimhan (Narsi), A.T. Moorthy

ZF Middle East, LLC T: 971-6-574074
(mail) PO Box 26093 F: 971-6-5747174
Sharjah, U.A.E.
(shipping) #502 Golden Tower Building
Sharjah [email protected]
[email protected]
www.zf-marine.com
MMC-151, Rev. Z-Z-I 9-05
Factory Authorized Service Centers - North America

ZF Marine Electronics, LLC

MMC-151, Rev. Z-Z-I 9-05 Mukilteo Plant

Factory Authorized Service Centers – North America

Factory Training Indicated by: MMC = MicroCommander,
CL = ClearCommand, MC = MasterCommand, CR = CruiseCommand.

ALASKA ALASKA
5005 Keith Stephens 5395 Karl Johnson
Alaska Professional Marine T: 907-789-9740 Rainbow Glacier Company T: 907-766-2218
(mail) PO Box 32083 PO Box 821
Juneau, AK 99803 F: 907-789-0054 Haines, AK 99827 F: 907-766-2585
(ship) 1900 Fritz Cove Road
Juneau, AK 99803

6950 William Shattenberg 2104 Mel Holmgren, John Teas, Eric Holmgren
Anchor Electric T: 907-780-3690 Sitka Electronics Lab T: 907-747-6570
5362 Commercial Blvd. 232 Katlian Avenue
Juneau, AK 99801 F: 907-780-3692 Sitka, AK 99835 F: 907-747-6170

[email protected] [email protected]
[email protected]

399 Butch 5396 Steve Spaulding

Kachemak Gear Shed T: 907-235-7993 Spaulding Sports Supply T: 907-488-6998
3625 eAST eND rOAD 2017 Badger Road T: 907-488-5242
Homer, AK 99603 F: 907-235-7233 North Pole, AK 99708 F: 907-488-6385

5394 Ken Perry 2108 Gene Lorenson

Ketchikan Area Timber and Marine Supply T: 907-225-6644 Sutliff's Hardware Inc T: 907-486-5797
2547 Tongass Avenue PO Box 1157
Ketchikan, AK 99901 F: 907-247-0644 Kodiak, AK 99615 F: 907-486-4977

2111 Mike Luhr 3184 Chet Powell, Mike Ottesen

Piston & Rudder T: 907-772-4240 The Bay Company T: 907-874-3340
(mail) PO Box 1308 431 Front Street
Petersburg, AK 99833 F: 907-772-4239 Wrangell, AK 99929 F: 907-874-2592
(ship) 101 A Harbor Way
Petersburg, AK 99833
[email protected]

ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, LLC 12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Fax (425) 493-1569
Page B-5
 ALASKA ARIZONA
2900 Steve Ringleman
Timber & Marine T: 907-225-6644 Mobile Marine Repair, Inc. T: 928-645-1406
2547 Tongass Ave. PO Box 2988
Ketchikan, AK 99001 F: 907-225-0644 Page, AZ 86040 F: 928-645-1406

MMC

3652 John Wikan 2488 Steve Adamczyk, Steve Ringleman, Jason Giffen
Wikan Enterprises, Inc. T: 907-772-4155 Old West Marine Service T: 928-645-2705
(mail) PO Box 929 (mail) Po Box 4798
Petersburg, AK 99833 F: 907-772-4153 Page, AZ 86040 F: 928-645-2542
(ship) 103 Dock Street (ship) 1002 Vista
Petersburg, AK 99833 Page, AZ 86040
[email protected] [email protected]
MMC

ARKANSAS 2331 Jay Phelps, Jerry Apalategui

6337 Tiny Joe Skipperliner T: 928-645-2444
Dreamchaser Houseboats T: 870-867-3480 (mail) PO Box 3058
(mail) PO Box 356 Page, AZ 86040 F: 928-645-5753
Mt. Ida, AR 71957 F: 870-867-2665 (ship) 550 Haul Road
(ship) 60 Marina Drive Page, AZ 86040
Mt. Ida, AR 71957

MMC
Mike Montgomery, Glenn Carson
Skipperliner - Lake Pleasant T: 928-501-2444
ARIZONA 40202 N. 87th Avenue
Mark Suttie
Aramark/Lake Powell Resorts & Marinas T: 928-645-1186 Peoria, AZ 85382 F: 928-501-2443
PO Box 1597
Page, AZ 86040 F: 928-645-1101
[email protected]
MMC
[email protected]
MMC 2381 Tony Ferrando
Tony's Dri-Doc & Marine T: 928-645-2732
(mail) PO Box 897
7048 Jim Ronnie, Jim Prestin, Mark Munsinger
Desert Recreation, Inc. T: 928-754-4391 Page, AZ 86040 F: 928-645-5237
315 Long Avenue (ship) 902 Hemlock
Bullhead City, AZ 86429 F: 928-754-3335 Page, AZ 86040

MMC
[email protected]
MMC CANADA - British Columbia
5139 Mike Lewis, Basil Drinnan
5935 Donn DeVore Canoe Cove Marina T: 250-656-5566
Donn's Boat Shop, Inc. T: 928-645-0313 2300 Canoe Cove Road
(mail) PO Box 3826 Sidney, BC V8L 3X9 F: 250-655-7197
Page, AZ 86040 F: 928-645-0323
(ship) 486 Haul Road
Page, AZ 86040
[email protected] *
MMC
5031 Don Pederson
Coast Electric T: 250-627-8531
1852 Sloan Avenue
Prince Rupert, BC V8J 4B5 F: 250-627-8531

[email protected]

Page B-6
 CANADA - British Columbia CALIFORNIA
2949 Bill McArthur 2472 Mike Han, Kip Fatout
McArthur Enterprises Inc. T: 250-883-4640 Jones Valley & Shasta Lake Resorts T: 530-275-7950
#326 - 129 Burnett Road 22300 Jones Valley Marina Road
Victoria, BC V9B 4P6 Redding, CA 96003 F: 530-275-3523

[email protected]
MMC, CL *

CALIFORNIA 7337 Roger Nunez, Manuel Lopez

2393 Roger Adams Reliable Marine Electronics T: 510-885-0525
A to Z Marine Services T: 619-224-1606 1925 Lafayette Street
1453 Rosecrans Street Alameda, CA 94501 F: 510-885-0526
San Diego, CA 92106 F: 619-226-0496
M: 619-921-6697
[email protected]
[email protected] MMC, CR
MMC, CL
7084 Brian Scoles
7543 Tony Greyshock, Rick Sullivan, John Sage Scoles Marine Services T: 909-678-6171
Blue Marlin Group T: 949-642-0882 615 LeHarve Avenue
624 Terminal Way Lake Elsinore, CA 92530-5386 F: 909-678-7807
Costa Mesa, CA 92627 F: 949-642-0419

CL
MMC, CL
Robert Sherrill, Caleb Linn
2498 Marc Hermann, Dan Teske Sherrill's Marine Service T: 310-510-1610
Channel Coast Marine T: 805-985-0220 PO Box 2112
2949 W. 5th Street Avalon, CA 90704 F: 310-510-1352
Oxnard, CA 93030 F: 805-985-7707
M: 805-432-8256

MMC
MMC, CL
2456 Tony Travis
6805 Chris Schjoth Ship Shape Marine T: 510-272-9695
Chris Marine T: 530-275-3097 909 Marina Village Pkwy, #186
14265 Holiday Road Alameda, CA 94501 F: 510-419-0792
Redding, CA 96003 F: 530-275-3096 M: 510-206-0420

[email protected]
MMC, CL
MMC
7661 Henry Bramhall
2181 Ron Easley, Roberto Reyes Trans Pacific Distributors T: 707-426-6670
Easley Marine Inc. T: 949-631-0142 1941 Walters Court
1635 Superior Avenue, Unit 9 Fairfield, CA 94533 F: 707-426-0206
Costa Mesa, CA 92627 F: 949-631-0219

[email protected]
MMC, CL
CONNECTICUT
2733 Joe Donatini, Mark Egon, Larry Scroggins 2131 Greg Schroder
Johnson Hicks Marine Inc. T: 831-475-3383 Mystic River Marina T: 860-536-3936
333 C Lake Avenue 36 Quarry Road
Santa Cruz, CA 95062 F: 831-475-1498 Mystic, CT 06355 F: 860-536-0713

[email protected]
MMC *
ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, LLC 12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Fax (425) 493-1569
Page B-7
 FLORIDA GEORGIA
3387 Mike Handschmann 7587 Bill Willingham
ATM Marine, Inc. T: 305-251-7547 Maricom Electronics T: 912-354-4542
18730 Lenaire Drive 2911 River Drive
Miami, FL 33157 F: 305-238-6800 Thunderbolt, GA 31404 F: 912-356-1249
M: 305-926-3813

[email protected]
MMC, CL

3259 Dave Gillen 3013 Painter Stevenson

Dave Gillen Diesel T: 954-927-6500 Mobile Marine T: 770-965-1864
811 N.E. 3rd Street PO Box 1239
Dania Beach, FL 33004 F: 954-927-6090 Buford, GA 30515 F: 770-965-8446
M: 770-480-3805

[email protected]
MMC, CL MMC

6170 Shannon Neville, Nadja Dilger, David Laschomb 5946 Tim McNeil
Lost River Marine T: 772-283-1154 On Site Marine Service T: 770-614-0106
490 SW Salerno Road (mail) 2835 Still Meadows Way
Stuart, FL 34997 F: 772-283-9550 Buford, GA 30519 F: 770-271-1909
(ship) 6109 Holiday Road M: 404-867-1235
Buford, GA 30518
[email protected]
www.lostrivermarine.com

5742 Melody Dodamead HAWAII

Sea Wiz T: 305-289-4044 3157 Mike Rand
(mail) PO Box 501396 Mike Rand T: 808-960-1493
Marathon, FL 33050 F: 305-289-3090 75-1027 Henry Street, PMB 164
(ship) 8025 Gulf Stream Blvd. M: 305-481-0449 Kailua Kona, HI 96740 F: 808-325-1209
Marathon, FL 33050

6622 Pam Lenzion

St. Augustine Marine T: 904-824-4394
404 South Riberia Street IOWA
6863 Greg Stirn
St. Augustine, FL 32084 F: 904-824-9755 S & S Rentals, Inc. T: 563-538-4454
(mail) BOX 389 T: 563-538-4135
Lansing, IA 52151 F: 563-538-4454
(ship) 990 South Front Street
MMC
Lansing, IA 52151

5987 Enrique Giner

Yacht Electric Corporation T: 305-638-9777
7770 NW 53rd St
Miami, FL 33166 KENTUCKY
F: 305-994-7575
2270 Jamie Donahue
Pluckebaum Custom Boats, Inc. T: 502-228-0111
1231 State Road 1793
Prospect, KY 40059 F: 502-228-4767
MMC, CL

3353 Jim Monroe, Lee Moore

Yacht Equipment and Parts T: 954-463-7222
3330 SW 3rd. Avenue T: 800-349-9224
Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33315 F: 954-463-9009
M: Jim 954-868-1840

[email protected]
MMC, CL

ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, LLC 12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Fax (425) 493-1569
Page B-8
 LOUISIANA NORTH CAROLINA
3401 Bob Albrecht 2861 Gary Sorensen
Air Marine Radio T: 504-362-1226 Marine Control Systems T: 828-369-7572
2421 8th Street 76 May Apple Lane
Harvey, LA 70058 F: 504-368-2668 Franklin, NC 28734 F: 828-369-7572
M: 828-508-4201

(owners personal e-mail)

[email protected] MMC marinecontrolsys.com

MASSACHUSETTS NEW JERSEY

5596 Martin Niemiec 3195 Charles Hewitt
Niemiec Marine T: 508-997-7390 Martek Electronics T: 609-390-3355
173 Popes Island 47 South Shore Rd
New Bedford, MA 02740 F: 508-997-8978 Marmora, NJ 08223 F: 609-390-0849
M: 609-517-5595

MMC, CL *

MARYLAND 5597 Dave Wrigley

5906 Ben Sheets South Jersey Offshore Electric T: 609-884-6400
Hinckley Yachts Svcs T: 410-226-5113 900 Ocean Dr.
(mail) PO Box 369 Cape May, NJ 08204 F: 609-884-2995
Oxford, MD 21654 F: 410-226-5602
(ship) Bank Street
Oxford, MD 21654

MMC
NEVADA
2530 Eric R. Carl, John Weaver, Darren Weaver 7050 Jim Bell, Scott Wall
Middle River Electronics T: 410-687-6474 A & M Marine T: 702-293-1321
233C Nanticoke Road 1630 Foothill Drive
Baltimore, MD 21221 F: 410-687-3353 Boulder City, NV 89005 F: 702-293-5896

[email protected]
MMC MMC

NORTH CAROLINA 2291 Carl Ward

3601 Tom Demann Callville Bay Resort & Marina T: 702-565-4813
Demann Marine Power T: 910-791-6222 HCR 30 Box 100
107 Bryan Road Las Vegas, NV 89124 F: 702-566-9899
Wilmington, NC 28412 F: 910-791-7056

MMC

7206 Chad Ewing, Paul Chandler

5380 Don Griffin, Don Griffin Jr., Casey Carr Overton Beach Marina T: 702-394-4040
Griffin Marine Inc T: 252-473-1422 HC30 Box 7
(mail) PO Box 458 Overton, NV 89040 F: 702-394-4142
Wanchese, NC 27981 F: 252-473-4654
(ship) 898 Harbor Road M: 252-305-1173
Wanchese, NC 27981
[email protected] MMC
MMC, CL

ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, LLC 12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Fax (425) 493-1569
Page B-9
 NEW YORK PENNSYLVANIA
2066 Dennis McGowan 5272 Joe Loughran, James Moorhead
Den-Mac Sales T: 631-842-8967 Airline Hydraulics Corporation T: 215-638-4700
8 Ramick Drive W. Expressway 95 Business Center
Amityville, NY 11701 F: 631-842-5274 Bensalem, PA 19020 F: 215-638-1707

"Sales Only" MMC, CL

Bob Lew PUERTO RICO

Lion Yacht Service T: 516-528-8062 5852 David Davila
P O Box 5378 Yacht Specialty T: 787-755-4406
Bay Shore, NY 11706 F: 631-666-1379 RR#2 Box 693
San Juan, PR 00926 F: 787-755-4406
M: 787-397-7518
[email protected]
"Service Only"
MMC
2260 Mark Jarboe
Montauk Marine Basin, Inc. T: 631-668-5900
(mail) PO Box 610 SOUTH CAROLINA
3196 Tony Smircic
Montauk, NY 11954 F: 631-668-5659 MacKay Communications T: 843-766-3856
(ship) 426 Westlake Drive 1369 B Ashley River Rd
Montauk, NY 11954 Charleston, SC 29407 F: 843-571-5301

OREGON
6671 Jeff Dykes
Cook Engine & Co. T: 503-289-8466
503 NE Tomahawk Island Drive TENNESSEE
5391 R.S. Simpson
Portland, OR 97217 F: 503-286-2836 Simpson Marine Electronics T: 865-966-8481
(mail) PO Box 22213
Knoxville, TN 37933 F: 865-966-9707
[email protected]
(ship) 665 Chapel Point Lane
Knoxville, TN 37922

544 Terry Wheeler, Scott Graf, Laurie Wheeler MMC

Curry Marine T: 541-265-7955
(mail) PO Box 610
Newport, OR 97365 TEXAS
F: 541-265-4226
2266 Dennis Osborne, Danny Baldwin
(ship) 1211 SE Bay Blvd.
Lakewood Yacht Service T: 281-474-2885
Newport, OR 97365 (mail) PO Box 536
Seabrook, TX 77586 F: 281-474-2885
(ship) 2301 Nasa Road 1
Seabrook, TX 77586
6474 Bill Elderkin, Paul Kepford [email protected]
George's Marine Electric T: 541-888-5209
PO Box 5530
Charleston, OR 97420 F: 541-888-9557
UTAH
Mark Grahn
Aramark - Halls Crossing T: 435-684-7019
PO Box 5101
Lake Powell, UT 84533 F: 435-684-7027

6873 paul Wilson

Sells Marine T: 503-285-3838
1111 NE Marine Dr.
Portland, OR 97211

ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, LLC 12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Fax (425) 493-1569
Page B-10
 UTAH WASHINGTON
Tami Luckesen 2410 Keith Ozby
Bullfrog Boat Shop T: 435-684-3018 Harris Electric Inc. T: 206-282-8080
PO Box 4055 4020 23rd Ave. W.
Lake Powell, UT 84533 F: 435-684-3005 Seattle, WA 98199 F: 206-284-5521

MMC *

5401 Darryl Hickson, Chris Pear 2273 Ron Meng

Offshore Marina, Inc. T: 435-788-2142 Ext. 11 Islands Marine Center, Inc. T: 360-468-3377
(mail) PO Box 330330 (mail) PO Box 88
Lake Powell, UT 84533 F: 435-788-2303 Lopez Island, WA 98261 F: 360-468-2283
(ship) Hwy 276, Mile Marker 30 (ship) Fishermens Bay Road
Lake Powell, UT 84533 Lopez Island, WA 98261
[email protected]
MMC, CL, CR, MC

VIRGINIA 2008 Chuck Knapp

3304 Craig Messick LeClerq Marine Construction T: 206-283-8555
Bluewater Yacht Sales, Inc. T: 757-723-0793 1080 W. Ewing
25 Marina Road Seattle, WA 98119 F: 206-286-1726
Hampton, VA 23669 F: 757-723-3320

*
MMC
6626 Skip Dassler
Marine Servicenter, Inc. - ANA T: 360-293-8200
WASHINGTON 2417 "T" Ave.
6186
Anacortes Yacht Charters T: 360-293-4555 Anacortes, WA 98221 F: 360-293-9648
2415 T Avenue, #112
Anacortes, WA 98221 F: 360-293-6683

1261
Maritime Fabrications T: 360-466-3629
(mail) PO Box 816
2967 Jim Palmer
Complete Controls T: 360-904-7525 LaConner, WA 98257 F: 360-466-3632
9306 NE 7th Street (ship) 920 West Pearle Jensen Way
Vancouver, WA 98664 F: 360-254-7846 LaConner, WA 98257
M: 360-904-7525

[email protected]
MMC 3494 Dave Williams, Mike Curran
North Harbor Diesel Inc. T: 360-293-5551
720 30th Street
6662 Bill Mol
Components Unlimited T: 360-336-9698 Anacortes, WA 98221 F: 360-293-0728
17315 Olympic Place
Mt. Vernon, WA 98274 F: 360-424-8950
[email protected]
M: 206-915-0712
MMC, CL

* 5443 Scott Morris

Ocean Alexander Marine Center T: 206-547-1395
1115 N. Northlake Way
Seattle, WA 98103 F: 206-547-3789

ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, LLC 12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Fax (425) 493-1569
Page B-11
 WASHINGTON
7344 Dave Hanson
Pinnacle Marine Services T: 360-404-2063
160 Cascade Place #229
Burlington, WA 98223 F: 360-404-2064
M: 360-920-1630

[email protected]
MMC, CL, CR, MC

2383 Paul Waits

Puget Sound Yacht Service T: 206-660-3630
9611 - 146th Place SE
Snohomish, WA 98296 F: 425-483-0710

[email protected]
*

2729 Bill Pulse

Radar Marine Electronics T: 360-733-2012
16 Squallicum Mall Blvd.
Bellingham, WA 98225 F: 360-733-2383

6669 Randy Widen

Reliance Marine Electronics T: 206-781-1105
2436 NW 61St
Seattle, WA 98107 F: 206-789-9775

[email protected]
* Here from July - April (See also AK)

3506 Jim Brown

Yacht Care Inc. T: 206-285-2600
2601 West Marina Place, Ste. K
Seattle, WA 98199 F: 206-285-2610

ZF MARINE ELECTRONICS, LLC 12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B Telephone (425) 583-1900
Mukilteo, WA 98275 Fax (425) 493-1569
Page B-12
APPENDIX C
Drawing 11748, Single Screw, Two Stations

Page C-1
Page C-2
Drawing 11746, Single Screw, Two Pluggable Stations

Page C-3
Page C-4
Drawing 11747, Twin Screw, Two Stations

Page C-5
Page C-6
Drawing 11745, Twin Screw, Two Pluggable Stations

Page C-7
Page C-8
Drawing 12230-1 Power Option #1

Page C-9
Page C-10
Drawing 12230-2 Power Option #2

Page C-11
Page C-12
Drawing 12230-3 Power Option #3

Page C-13
Page C-14
Drawing 12230-4 Power Option #4

Page C-15
Page C-16
Drawing 12230-5 Power Option #5

Page C-17
Page C-18
APPENDIX D
ZF Marine Elctronics, LLC
12125 Harbour Reach Drive
Suite B
Mukilteo, WA 98275

CruiseCommand 785CE
Operation, Installation &
Troublshooting Manual
Addendum
MM14430-I Rev H.1 6/08
Copyright
Copyright © 2005 ZF Marine Electronics, LLC
All Rights Reserved
No part of this publication may be copied or reproduced in any form, including an
electronic retrieval system or be made available on the Internet, a public network,
by satellite, or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZF Marine
Electronics, LLC, 12125 Harbour Reach Drive, Suite B, Mukilteo, WA 98275.

Legal Information
The information in this manual is believed to be accurate at the time of
publication, but no responsibility, direct or consequential, can be accepted for
damage resulting from the use of this information. ZF Marine Electronics, LLC,
reserves the right to make changes to any of its products without notice.

June 5, 2008 Page 2 of 14

 Table of Contents
SW13687.1F

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTIONS…………………………………………………………………….5
1.1 Throttle Rate Control…………………………………………………………………………5
1.2 Speed Boost………………………………………………………………………………………5
1.3 Fixed Neutral Delay……………………………………………………………………………5
1.4 Additional Synchronization Options……………………………………………………5

2. THROTTLE RATE CONTROL…………………………………………………………………6

2.1 Function Code E9, Throttle Rate Increase…………………………………………….6
2.2 Function Code EA, Throttle Rate Decrease…………………………………………..6
2.3 Proportional Pause Time Delay (as a function of Throttle Command
Output Value)………………………………………………………………………………………….6
2.4 Engaging a Clutch (as a function of Throttle Command Output Value)…..7

3. SPEED BOOST……………………………………………………………………………………….7
3.1 Implementation of Speed Boost………………………………………………………….8
3.2 Function Code F0: BOOST_PERCENT……………………………………..............8
3.3 Function Code F1: BOOST_DURATION……………………………………………..9
3.4 Function Code F2: BOOST_START_DELAY………………………………………..9
3.5 Function Code F3: BOOST_BYPASS_CLUTCH_DELAY……………………….9

4. FIXED NEUTRAL DELAY………………………………………………………………………..10

5. ADDITIONAL SYNCHRONZATION OPTIONS…………………………………………10

6. COMPLETE FUNCTION CODE LIST………………………………………………………..11

June 5, 2008 Page 3 of 14

June 5, 2008 Page 4 of 14
Addendum to MM14330 CruiseCommand (785CE) Installation,
Operation and Troubleshooting Manual

This Addendum is written as a stand alone document to supplement CruiseCommand

Manual MM14330 Rev H.1 4-08. The additional features described are incorporated
into software version SW13687.1F which is installed in CruiseCommand Processors
with serial numbers ZE11788 and above.

Section 1 General Descriptions

This latest software revision contains the following features and enhancements:

1.1 Throttle Rate Control

The CruiseCommand Throttle Rate Control applies rate control to the Throttle
Command Output. Function Codes are provided to allow the installer to
control how fast the Throttle Command Output increases and decreases.

1.2 Speed Boost

Speed Boost is a transient increase in the Speed Command output signal from
the Processor during clutch engagement. Its purpose is to decrease the
possibility of stalling the engine upon clutch engagement or a reversal in
direction (e.g. Ahead to Astern). Speed Boost is rarely required and its
necessity should be assessed during sea trials.

1.3 Fixed Neutral Delay

Fixed Neutral Delay is the amount of time the Processor will command
Neutral on every shift from Ahead to Astern or vice versa. This delay is in
addition to any Proportional Pause that has accrued. Function Code C8 is
used to adjust the duration in seconds of the Fixed Neutral Delay.

1.4 Additional Synchronization Options

This revision provides the installer additional options for the engine
synchronization Function Code E7.

June 5, 2008 Page 5 of 14

 Section 2 Throttle Rate Control

2.1 Function Code E9, Throttle Rate Increase

a. This Function Code determines how fast the Throttle Command Output
increases from one value to another. The time entered into the E9
Function Code is used to calculate the increase rate of the Throttle
Command Output.
The selected Throttle Rate Increase time determines the change in the
Throttle Command from Idle to 100% Throttle Command Output. Smaller
commanded throttle changes take proportionally less time.
b. Default value = 0.8 seconds (800ms).
c. Range = 0.0 to 5.0 seconds.
d. Minimum adjustable increment = 0.1 second (100ms).

2.2 Function Code EA, Throttle Rate Decrease

a. This Function code controls how fast the Throttle Command Output
decreases from one value to another. The time entered into EA Function
Code is used to calculate the decrease rate of the Throttle Command
Output.
The selected Throttle Rate Decrease time determines the change in the
Throttle Command from 100% Throttle Command to Idle. Smaller
commanded throttle changes take proportionally less time.
b. Default value = 0.8 seconds (800ms).
c. Range = 0.0 to 5.0 seconds.
d. Minimum adjustable increment = 0.1 second (100ms).

2.3 Proportional Pause Time Delay (as a function of Throttle Command

Output value)
a. This software revision does not affect the operation of the Proportional
Pause Time Delay as it exists in the previous versions of the software.
• Example: If the Proportional Pause is set to 5 seconds and the
Throttle Rate Decrease to 3 seconds, the astern clutch should engage
5 seconds after moving the Control Head lever from Full Ahead to
Astern.

June 5, 2008 Page 6 of 14

 2.4 Engaging a Clutch as a Function of the Throttle Command Output
Value.
a. The software will not allow a clutch engagement if the Throttle Command
Output is above Idle speed (either High or Low Idle, whichever is currently
active).
• Example: If the Proportional Pause is set to 3 seconds and the
Throttle Rate Decrease to 5 seconds, the Astern clutch will engage 5
seconds after moving the Control Head lever from Full Ahead to
Astern.
Section 3 Speed Boost
Speed Boost is a transient increase in the Speed Command output signal from
the Processor during clutch engagement. Its purpose is to decrease the
possibility of stalling the engine upon clutch engagement or a reversal in
direction (e.g. Ahead to Astern). Speed Boost is rarely required and its
necessity should be assessed during sea trials.
There are four Function Codes associated with Speed Boost (F0, F1, F2 and
F3) which are described below. Not all functions need to be adjusted and
determining the best values for these functions requires a trial and error
process during sea trials. Typically the timing of Speed Boost is the most
critical function to set, not the amount of Speed Boost.

Warning: Misapplication of Speed Boost can damage the transmission or other

equipment. Before using Speed Boost, the transmission representative must be consulted
! about its use and limitations on clutch engagement as a function of engine speed. The
person(s) implementing Speed Boost have the responsibility for ensuring it is
implemented properly and for any damage that might occur.

Warning: With a properly set and timed Speed Boost signal, the engine speed should not
increase significantly (if at all) during clutch engagement. Engine speed should remain at
or slightly above idle as the clutch begins to engage. A slight amount of droop below idle
! may occur as the clutch pressure rises, but not rise significantly above idle until the clutch
is fully engaged. Transmission or other damage may occur if this is not followed. Adjust
the Function Codes as needed to meet this requirement.

NOTE: Speed Boost has been used with some electronic engines where there is a stalling
problem due to the engine being unable to respond quickly enough to a sudden load
(clutch engagement). This is more common in vessels with a high reduction gear ratio
(typically 4:1 or higher) or to reduce the droop in engine speed (rpm) as the clutch
engages.

June 5, 2008 Page 7 of 14

 NOTE: Use of Speed Boost does not guarantee that an engine will not stall. Ultimately
the engine must be capable of producing the power required in the time frame necessary
to handle the sudden clutch engagement.

3.1 Implementation of Speed Boost

Slow speed reversals should be attempted initially without Speed Boost and
the amount of engine speed loss, or droop (how far the engine speed drops
below idle), recorded. Before using Speed Boost, Fixed Neutral Delay is
another option that may prevent engine stalling or excessive drop in engine
speed. This should be tried before using Speed Boost. If it is determined that
Speed Boost is necessary, then the Function Codes should be adjusted based
on observation of engine response during slow speed reversals. A high speed
reversal should be attempted only after adequate testing at slow vessel speeds.
Start by applying Speed Boost and Boost Duration in small increments and
record the results and work upward from there.
• Example: For an 1800 rpm engine with Idle set at 600 rpm, try a
starting point of 3% or 4% for Speed Boost and a Boost Duration of 1
second. If this is unsatisfactory, increase Boost Duration to 2 seconds
and evaluate the results.
Typically the timing of Speed Boost is the most critical Function to set, not
the amount of Speed Boost. BOOST_START_DELAY may need to be
adjusted in order to get Speed Boost just before the clutches start to transmit
significant load to the engine. Again, start with a small value initially (for
example, 200 milliseconds which is F2 set to 0.2 seconds).
The engine response when engaging the clutch at slow speed should also be
observed. If the engine speed increases too much during slow speed
maneuvering/ clutch engagements, the F3 Function Code may be used to
link the use of Speed Boost to the Proportional Pause Time (Reversal Pause
Time) function.

3.2 Function Code F0: BOOST_PERCENT

This Function is used to adjust the percent of throttle to be applied during
speed boost.

NOTE: Zero percent (00.0%) Speed Command means Idle speed, while 100% means Full
Speed.

June 5, 2008 Page 8 of 14

 ! Warning: The range for this Function is 0.0 to 50.0%. Using a value of 50% will likely
damage the transmission. This range is provided to allow as much leeway as possible
when using this Function, but is not intended to mean you should use 50%.

Units: % (Percent of Throttle)

Default Value: 0.0
Range: 0.0 to 50.0
Example: A value of 0 means no Speed Boost is used and the Speed
Command remains at Idle Speed (0%) as the clutch is engaged.
A value of 3.5 means a 3.5% increase in Speed Command
Output during clutch engagement.

3.3 Function Code F1: BOOST_DURATION

This Function controls how long of a period of time the speed boos is applied.
The time starts when BOOST_START_DELAY has expired.

Units: Seconds
Default: 0.0
Range: 0.0 to 20.0
Examples: A value of 0.0 is 0.0 seconds.
A value of 2.5 is 2.5 seconds.
A value of 5.0 is 5.0 seconds.

3.4 Function Code F2: BOOST_START_DELAY

This Function controls how long after the ahead (or astern) clutch has been
commanded until speed boost is applied. This is an open loop method of
applying speed boost just before the load hits the engine (the clutches transmit
significant torque). The open loop method lacks the ability to determine gear
oil temperature, so it is best to adjust speed boost after the gear oil has reached
normal operating temperatures.

Units: Seconds
Default: 0.0
Range: 0.0 to 10.0
Examples: A value of 0.0 is 0.0 seconds.
A value of 0.1 is 100 milliseconds.
A value of 0.3 is 300 milliseconds.
A value of 10.0 is 10.0 seconds.
June 5, 2008 Page 9 of 14
 3.5 Function Code F3: BOOST_BYPASS_CLUTCH_DELAY
This Function controls if speed boost is applied as a function of the reversal
pause time instead of every time the clutch is engaged.
For example, if F3 is set to 10 (10 x 100 milliseconds = 1 second), then speed
boost would be applied only if the reversal pause time is greater than 1
second. This Function might be useful for boats that only need speed boost
during a crash reversal.
Units: Seconds
Default: 0.0
Range: 0.0 to 99.0
Examples: A value of 0.0 is 0.0 seconds.
A value of 1 is 1 second.
A value of 99.0 is 99.0 seconds.

Section 4 Fixed Neutral Delay

Fixed Neutral Delay (Function Code C8) is the amount of time the Processor
will command Neutral on every shift from Ahead to Astern and vice versa.
This delay is in addition to any Proportional Pause that has accrued.
Units: Seconds
Range: 0.0 to 4.0 seconds.
Default: 0.0
Example 1: Assume function code C2 (Proportional Pause) is set for option
00 (In-Gear), C3 (Proportional Pause Time) is set for 6 seconds,
and C8 is set for 1 second. If the boat has been operating at full
speed ahead for an extended period of time and the operator
commands astern direction, the Processor will command idle
speed and remain in Ahead for 6 seconds (function code C3).
After the 6 seconds expires the Processor will command
Neutral and remain in Neutral for 1 second before
commanding Astern clutch.
Example 2: Assume the function codes are set per Example 1. If no
Proportional Delay has accrued and the operator moves the
Control Lever from Ahead to Astern, the Processor will
command Neutral for 1 second before commanding Astern
clutch.
Example 3: Assume the function codes are set per Example 1 with the
exception that C8 is set to 0.2. If no Proportional Delay has
accrued and the operator moves the Control Lever from Ahead

June 5, 2008 Page 10 of 14

 to Astern, the Processor will command Neutral for 0.2 seconds
(200ms) before commanding Astern clutch.

Section 5 Additional Synchronization Options

Additional options for the engine synchronization Function Code E7.
00– Equal Throttle (Open Loop) Synchronization
01– Active (Closed Loop) Synchronization. The Processor reverts to
Equal Throttle if the Tachometer Input Signal is lost.
02– No Synchronization
03– Active (Closed Loop) Synchronization. No Synchronization if
the Tachometer Input Signal is lost.
Default: 01

NOTE: With older CruiseCommands E7 is used to either enable (E7=01) or disable

(E7=00) Active Synchronization.

Section 6 Complete Function Code List

Function Function Name Default Value Range or Options

Code Value

A0 Processor 00 01 or 02
Identification

A1 Number of Engines 01 01- Single Screw

02- Twin Screw

A2 One Lever Operation 01 00- Disabled

01- Enabled

A3 SE (Station Expander) 00 00- Disabled

01- Enabled

A4 Neutral Indication 00 00- Disabled

Tone 01- Tone sounds when the control
head lever reaches neutral.
02- Tone sounds when shift
commands neutral.

E0 Engine Throttle Profile 06 01- 8- 92% PWM (Caterpillar)

02- 0.9- 4.5VDC (Cummins Centry)
03 0.9- 4.0VDC (Cummins Quantum)

June 5, 2008 Page 11 of 14

 04- 0.64- 4.65VDC (Detroit Diesel)
05- 4- 20mA. (MTU, MAN)
06- 0.42- 2.95VDC (Scania)
07- 0.5- 4.5VDC (John Deere)
08- 0.6- 3.6VDC (Volvo EDC)
09- 120.64- 360.0Hz (Detroit 1600)
10- 120.64- 463.5Hz (Detroit 2300)

E1 Throttle in Neutral * 01.0- 25.0% of Throttle Range

E2 Throttle Minimum * 01.0- 97.0%

E3 Throttle Maximum * 04.0- 100.0%

E4 Throttle Maximum 100.0 1.0- 100.0%

Astern

E5 Throttle Pause 00.5 00.0- 05.0 Seconds

Following Shift

E6 High Idle 00.0 00.0- 20.0% of Function Code E3

E7 Synchronization 00 00- Equal Throttle (Open Loop)

01- Active (Closed Loop). Reverts to
Equal Throttle
02- No Synchronization
03- Active (Closed Loop). Reverts to
No Synchronization

E9 Throttle Rate Increase 00.8 00.0- 5.0 Seconds

EA Throttle Rate Decrease 00.8 00.0- 5.0 Seconds

C0 Clutch Oil Interlock 00 00- Not Installed

01- Installed
02- Throttle Clutch Pressure Interlock
Mode

C1 Clutch Oil Interlock 01.0 00.5- 10.0 Seconds

Delay

C2 Reversal Pause 00 00- In Gear

01- Neutral

C3 Reversal Pause Time 03 00- 99 Seconds

C4 Reversal Pause Ratio 00 00- 2:1 Ahd to Ast : Ast to Ahd

01- 1:1 Ahd to Ast : Ast to Ahd

June 5, 2008 Page 12 of 14

C8 Fixed Neutral Delay 0.0 0.0- 4.0 Seconds

L0 Troll Lever Range 00 00- No Troll

01- 20 Degrees- Type 1
02- 35 Degrees- Type 2
03- 45 Degrees- Type 3

L1 Troll Valve Function 00 00- Normal- No Current @ Lockup

01- Inverse- No Current @ Lockup
02- Normal- ZF220-550, 12VDC
03- Normal- ZF220-550, 24VDC
04- Normal- ZF2000 Series, 24VDC
05- Inverse- ZF600, 1900 & 2500
Series, 24VDC
06- ZF Hurth (12VDC)
07- ZF Hurth (24VDC)

L2 Troll Minimum * 01.0- 99.0%

L3 Troll Maximum * 02.0- 100.0%

L4 Troll Throttle Limit 00 00- 20% of Throttle Maximum

L5 Troll Pulse Duration 00.6 00.0- 09.9 Seconds

L6 Troll Pulse Percentage * 00.0- 100.0%

L7 Lockup Percentage 45 (L106) 00.0- 100.0%

(ZF Hurth only) 60 (L107)

F0 Boost Percent 0.0 0.0- 50.0%

F1 Boost Duration 0.0 0.0- 20.0 Seconds

F2 Boost Start Delay 0.0 0.0- 10.0 Seconds

F3 Boost Bypass Clutch 0.0 0.0- 99.0 Seconds

Delay

H0 Diagnostics -- Battery Input Voltage

Engine Tachometer Frequency
Station 1 Lever A/D
Station 2 Lever A/D
Station 3 Lever A/D
Station 4 Lever A/D
Stations 1- 4 Transfer Button

June 5, 2008 Page 13 of 14

 Software Revision Level

H1 Erase EEPROM -- Store to Erase

(Authorized Personnel Only)

H2 High Side Driver Fault 00 00- 63

Detection (Refer to Table 5-3 in Manual)

June 5, 2008 Page 14 of 14